Professional Documents
Culture Documents
B-63947EN/01
Vol. 1 of 2
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without
notice.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than
Warning and Caution.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is not
need to change them. When, however, there is not alternative other than
to change a parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the
parameter before making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine
itself, or injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on
the MDI panel until the position display or alarm screen appears on the
CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other
special operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in
other than its normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it
to behave unexpectedly.
2 The User’s Manual and programming manual supplied with a CNC unit
provide an overall description of the machine's functions, including any
optional functions. Note that the optional functions will vary from one
machine model to another. Therefore, some functions described in the
manuals may not actually be available for a particular model. Check the
specification of the machine if in doubt.
3 Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the
machine-tool builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual
supplied by the machine-tool builder for details of their use and any related
cautions.
4 The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very precise fabrication
technology. Some pixels may not be turned on or may remain on. This
phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is not a defect.
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile
memory in the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is
turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may
prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error
recovery. To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick
restoration of deleted data, backup all vital data, and keep the backup
copy in a safe place.
s-2
B-63947EN/01
WARNING
3 Function involving a rotary axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normal-direction
(perpendicular) control, pay careful attention to the speed of the rotary
axis. Incorrect programming may result in the rotary axis speed becoming
excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes the chuck to lose its
grip on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely. Such mishap is
likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury
to the user.
4 Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the
measurement units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter,
and current position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine
which measurement units are being used. Attempting to perform an
operation with invalid data specified may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
5 Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the
origin of the workpiece coordinate system, the spindle speed may become
excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum
allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectly
may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to
the user.
6 Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return
as required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position
return is performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is
not issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool,
the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
7 Tool post interference check
A tool post interference check is performed based on the tool data
specified during automatic operation. If the tool specification does not
match the tool actually being used, the interference check cannot be made
correctly, possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causing
injury to the user. After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool
post manually, always start automatic operation and specify the tool
number of the tool to be used.
CAUTION
1 Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or
vice versa, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
2 Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical
interpolation, or a canned cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
Refer to the descriptions of the respective functions for details.
3 Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit
skip is specified without the torque limit actually being applied, a move
command will be executed without performing a skip.
4 Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a
programmable mirror image is enabled.
5 Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference
position return command is issued in compensation function mode,
compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected
behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel
compensation function mode.
s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
HANDLING
This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of
machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the
supplied User’s Manual carefully, such that you are fully familiar with
their contents.
WARNING
1 Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of
the tool and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and
feedrate have been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine
may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to
the operator.
2 Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as
required.
If the machine is operated without first performing manual reference
position return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible
before manual reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Manual numeric command
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position
of the tool and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction,
and command have been specified correctly, and that the entered values
are valid.
Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the
operator.
4 Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such
as 100, applied causes the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless
handling may damage the tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.
5 Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable)
during threading, rigid tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be
predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
causing injury to the operator.
6 Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is
operating under the control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may
behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
tool, or causing injury to the user.
7 Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the
workpiece coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine
under the control of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making
allowances for any shift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine
may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself,
the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
8 Software operator's panel and menu switches
Using the software operator's panel and menu switches, in combination
with the MDI panel, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the
machine operator's panel, such as mode change, override value change,
and jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the
machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
s-4
B-63947EN/01
WARNING
9 RESET key
Pressing the RESET key stops the currently running program. As a result,
the servo axes are stopped. However, the RESET key may fail to function
for reasons such as an MDI panel problem. So, when the motors must be
stopped, use the emergency stop button instead of the RESET key to
ensure security.
CAUTION
1 Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the
machine, the tool path may vary when the machine is restarted. Before
restarting the machine after manual intervention, therefore, confirm the
settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental command mode.
2 Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be
disabled using custom macro system variable #3004. Be careful when
operating the machine in this case.
3 Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a
dry run, the machine operates at dry run speed, which differs from the
corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may
sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
4 Tool radius and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode,
because tool radius or tool nose radius compensation is not applied. When
a command is entered from the MDI to interrupt in automatic operation in
tool radius or tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention
to the tool path when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer
to the descriptions of the corresponding functions for details.
5 Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited
(modification, insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave
unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the control of that program.
Basically, do not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining
program while it is in use.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it
must retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters even while
external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within
a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC's memory will be lost.
Refer to the Section “Method of replacing battery” of the Part IV,
“Maintenance” in the User’s Manual (Common to T/M series) for details of
the battery replacement procedure.
s-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
2 Absolute Pulsecoder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the
machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine.
Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open,
only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely
dangerous electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The absolute Pulsecoder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within
a week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the Pulsecoder will
be lost.
Refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual for
details of the battery replacement procedure.
WARNING
3 Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and
remove the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety
and maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit presents an extremely
dangerous electric shock hazard.
s-6
PREFACE
The Operation and Maintenance Handbook is for persons who are
familiar with NC programs and operations. It is used to refer to
necessary information quickly in operating or maintaining NC machine
tools at a work site.
The Handbook only contains reference information. It does not contain
other types of information, such as essential information or notes. Read
the following manuals first.
The Handbook assumes that the reader is familiar with the information in
the following manuals.
For information on safety precautions, be sure to read "SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS" described on the first page of the manual.
NOTE
1 For an explanatory purpose, the following descriptions may be used
according to the types of path control used:
• T series: For the lathe system
• M series: For the machining center system
2 Unless otherwise noted, the model names 31i/310i/310is-A,
31i/310i/310is-A5, and 32i/320i/320is-A are collectively referred to as
30i/300i/300is. However, this convention is not necessarily observed
when item 3 below is applicable.
3 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some
products. For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B-63942EN).
M
-
Indicates a description that is valid only for the machine center system
set as system control type (in parameter No. 0983).
In a general description of the method of machining, a machining center
system operation is identified by a phase such as "for milling machining".
T
-
Indicates a description that is valid only for the lathe system set as
system control type (in parameter No. 0983).
In a general description of the method of machining, a lathe system
operation is identified by a phrase such as "for lathe cutting".
p-1
B-63947EN/01
-
Indicates the end of a description of a system control type.
When a system control type mark mentioned above is not followed by
this mark, the description of the system control type is assumed to
continue until the next item or paragraph begins. In this case, the next
item or paragraph provides a description common to the control types.
NOTE
1 Each of the parameters of the bit, bit machine group, bit path, bit axis, and
bit spindle types consists of 8 bits for one data number (parameters with
eight different meanings).
2 For machine group types, parameters corresponding to the maximum
number of machine groups are present, so that independent data can be
set for each machine group.
3 For path types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
paths are present, so that independent data can be set for each path.
4 For axis types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
control axes are present, so that independent data can be set for each
control axis.
5 For spindle types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
spindles are present, so that independent data can be set for each spindle
axis.
6 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The
range varies according to the parameters. For the valid data range of a
specific parameter, see the explanation of the parameter.
p-2
PREFACE
(4) Related manuals of Series 30i/300i/300is- MODEL A,
Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A, Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A5,
Series 32i/320i/320is- MODEL A
The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i/300i/300is-A,
Series 31i/310i/310is-A, Series 31i/310i/310is-A5, Series
32i/320i/320is-A. This manual is indicated by an asterisk (*).
Specification
Manual name
number
DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1
USER’S MANUAL B-63944EN
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)
USER’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-63944EN-1
USER’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-63944EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-65950EN
Programming
Macro Compiler / Macro Executor B-63943EN-2
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Macro Compiler OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-66264EN
C Language Executor OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63944EN-3
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63983EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63994EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN
DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64044EN
FL-net Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64164EN
Operation guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63874EN
MANUAL GUIDE i Set-up Guidance B-63874EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
p-3
B-63947EN/01
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Either of the following servo motors and the corresponding spindle can
be connected to the CNC covered in this manual.
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series
of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information, refer to
the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually connected.
p-4
Table of Contents
Volume 1 of 2
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION ................................... 1 1
3 G CODE ................................................................................. 67 3
10 PMC...................................................................................... 569 10
c-1
Table of Contents Volume 1 of 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................. s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ......................... s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS .......................................... s-1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING ........ s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING.................. s-4
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE........................... s-5
PREFACE .....................................................................................p-1
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION ................................... 1
1.1 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS ................................................. 1
1.1.1 7.2" LCD CNC Display Panel ........................................ 1
1.1.2 8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel ........................................ 1
1.1.3 10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel ...................................... 2
1.1.4 12.1" LCD CNC Display Panel ...................................... 2
1.1.5 15" LCD CNC Display Panel ......................................... 3
1.1.6 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) ...................................... 4
1.1.7 Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key)............................... 4
1.1.8 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)............................................ 5
1.1.9 Explanation of the MDI Keyboard .................................. 6
1.2 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS .......................................... 9
1.2.1 General Screen Operations........................................... 9
1.3 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................ 15
1.3.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System 15
1.3.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System .... 17
1.3.3 Overall Position Display .............................................. 19
1.3.4 Handle Interrupt Display.............................................. 20
1.3.5 Operating Monitor Display ........................................... 21
1.4 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
(MEMORY MODE) .................................................................... 23
1.4.1 Program Contents Display........................................... 23
1.4.2 Program Check Screen ............................................... 24
1.4.3 Next Block Display Screen .......................................... 25
1.5 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
(EDIT MODE) ............................................................................ 26
1.5.1 Editing a Program........................................................ 26
1.5.2 Program Folder Screen ............................................... 28
1.6 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................ 29
1.6.1 Setting and Displaying the Tool Offset Value .............. 29
1.6.2 Displaying and Entering Setting Data .......................... 32
1.6.3 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset
Value........................................................................... 34
1.6.4 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value
Measured .................................................................... 35
1.6.5 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common
Variables ..................................................................... 36
1.6.6 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator's Panel 37
1.6.7 Character-to-Codes Correspondence Table................ 39
1.7 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................ 40
1.7.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters ............................. 40
1.7.2 Checking by Self-Diagnosis Screen ............................ 41
1.7.3 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate
System Specified by CNC - Coordinate System .......... 42
1.7.4 Displaying and Setting Pitch Error Compensation
Data ............................................................................ 46
1.8 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................ 49
1.8.1 Alarm Display .............................................................. 49
1.8.2 Alarm History Display .................................................. 51
1.9 HELP FUNCTION...................................................................... 52
1.9.1 Initial Menu Screen...................................................... 52
c-2
B-63947EN/01
c-3
Table of Contents
6.3 STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE ................... 170
6.3.1 Hardware Structure ................................................... 170
6.3.2 Overview of Hardware............................................... 171
6.3.3 Total Connection Diagrams ....................................... 172
6.3.4 Control Unit ............................................................... 175
6.3.5 Display Unit for 30i/31i/32ii ....................................... 180
6.3.5.1 10.4” display unit ....................................... 180
6.3.5.2 15” display unit .......................................... 185
6.3.6 Display Unit for 300is/310is/320is ............................. 191
6.3.6.1 Main board of display unit for is series
CNC .......................................................... 191
6.3.6.2 Inverter PCBs, fan adapter PCBs, and
connector units .......................................... 198
6.3.6.3 Backup unit................................................ 200
6.3.7 List of Printed Circuit Boards and Units ..................... 201
6.3.7.1 Basic unit................................................... 201
6.3.7.2 List of printed circuit boards of control unit. 201
6.3.7.3 List of display unit for 30i/31i/32i ............... 202
6.3.7.4 Display unit for 300is/310is/320is.............. 204
6.3.7.5 MDI unit ..................................................... 208
6.3.8 I/O ............................................................................. 209
6.3.8.1 Others ....................................................... 210
6.4 MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND
STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)..................................... 212
6.4.1 Optional Board .......................................................... 212
6.4.1.1 Fast Ethernet board................................... 212
6.4.1.2 Additional axis board ................................. 216
6.4.1.3 Additional spindle board ............................ 217
6.4.1.4 HSSB interface board................................ 218
6.4.1.5 FL-net board.............................................. 219
6.4.1.6 PROFIBUS board ...................................... 223
6.4.1.7 DeviceNet board........................................ 225
6.4.1.8 Mounting locations of optional boards........ 231
6.4.2 Other Units ................................................................ 232
6.4.2.1 Separate detector interface unit................. 232
6.4.2.2 Analog input separate detector interface
unit ............................................................ 234
7 PARAMETERS .................................................................... 237
7.1 HOW TO ENTER THE PARAMETERS ................................... 237
7.2 PARAMETER LIST.................................................................. 239
7.2.1 Setting....................................................................... 241
7.2.2 DNC1/DNC2 Interface............................................... 242
7.2.3 System Configuration ................................................ 243
7.2.4 Axis Control............................................................... 243
7.2.5 Coordinate System.................................................... 245
7.2.6 Stroke Limit Check .................................................... 246
7.2.7 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier..................................... 247
7.2.8 Feedrate.................................................................... 248
7.2.9 Acceleration/Deceleration Control ............................. 250
7.2.10 Servo......................................................................... 252
7.2.11 DI/DO ........................................................................ 267
7.2.12 Display and Edit ........................................................ 269
7.2.13 Programs .................................................................. 276
7.2.14 Pitch Error Compensation ......................................... 280
7.2.15 Spindle Control.......................................................... 281
7.2.16 Serial Spindle ............................................................ 286
7.2.17 Spindle Control 2....................................................... 302
7.2.18 Tool Compensation ................................................... 303
7.2.19 Canned Cycle............................................................ 307
7.2.20 Rigid Tapping ............................................................ 310
7.2.21 Scaling/Coordinate Rotation...................................... 313
7.2.22 Single Direction Positioning....................................... 314
7.2.23 Polar Coordinate Interpolation................................... 314
7.2.24 Normal Direction Control ........................................... 314
7.2.25 Index Table ............................................................... 314
c-4
B-63947EN/01
c-5
Table of Contents Volume 2 of 2
c-6
B-63947EN/01
10 PMC...................................................................................... 569
10.1 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN........................................... 569
10.1.1 Transition of the PMC Screens.................................. 570
10.2 PMC DIAGNOSIS/MAINTENANCE SCREEN
([PMC MAINTE])...................................................................... 571
10.2.1 Monitoring PMC Signal Status ([STATUS] Screen) ... 572
10.2.2 Checking PMC Alarms ([PMC ALARM] Screen)........ 573
10.2.3 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers
([TIMER] Screen) ...................................................... 573
10.2.4 Setting and Displaying Counter Values
([COUNTR] Screen) .................................................. 575
10.2.5 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays
([KEEP RELAY] Screen) ........................................... 576
10.2.6 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen) 581
10.2.7 Data Input/Output ([I/O] Screen)................................ 585
10.2.8 Displaying I/O Link Connection Status
([I/O LINK] Screen).................................................... 587
10.2.9 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen) .................. 589
10.2.10 Setting of Trace Parameter
([TRACE SETING] Screen) ....................................... 589
10.2.11 Execution of Trace .................................................... 592
10.2.12 Monitoring the Network Communication Status and
the PMC Signal Status ([I/O DGN] Screen) ............... 593
10.3 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS
([PMC LADDER])..................................................................... 595
10.3.1 Displaying a Program List ([LIST] Screen)................. 596
10.3.2 Monitoring Ladder Diagrams ([LADDER] Screen) ..... 597
10.3.3 Collective Monitor Function ....................................... 598
10.3.4 Editing Ladder Programs........................................... 600
10.3.5 NET EDITOR Screen ................................................ 601
10.3.6 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen............................. 603
10.3.7 Duplicate Coil Check Function .................................. 604
10.4 PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS
([PMC CONFIG]) ..................................................................... 605
10.4.1 Displaying and Editing Title Data ([TITLE] Screens).. 606
10.4.1.1 PMC title data display screen .................... 606
10.4.1.2 Title (message) data display screen .......... 607
10.4.2 Displaying and Editing Symbol and Comment Data
([SYMBOL] Screens)................................................. 607
10.4.2.1 SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER
screen (basic format)................................. 607
10.4.2.2 SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER
screen (extended format)........................... 608
10.4.3 Displaying and Editing Message Data ([MESAGE]
Screens).................................................................... 609
10.4.4 Displaying and Editing I/O Module Allocation Data
([MODULE] Screens) ................................................ 609
10.4.4.1 I/O MODULE VIEWER screen................... 609
10.4.5 Displaying and Editing PMC Settings
([SETING] Screens) .................................................. 610
10.4.6 Displaying the Status of PMCs and Changing the
Target PMC ([PMC STATUS] Screens)..................... 613
10.4.7 Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Online
Function ([ONLINE] Screen)...................................... 613
10.4.8 Displaying and Setting System Parameters
([SYSTEM PARAM] Screens) ................................... 614
10.4.9 Displaying and Setting Configuration Parameters
([CONFIG PARAM] Screens) .................................... 616
10.4.9.1 MENU screen ............................................ 616
10.4.9.2 CNC-PMC INTERFACE screen................. 617
10.4.9.3 MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen ... 618
10.4.9.4 LADDER EXECUTION screen................... 619
10.4.9.5 PMC MEMORY SETTING screen ............. 620
10.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS .............................................. 621
10.5.1 List of Functional Instructions .................................... 621
10.5.2 Details of Functional Instructions............................... 625
c-7
Table of Contents
10.5.2.1 Timer ......................................................... 625
10.5.2.2 Counter ..................................................... 625
10.5.2.3 Data transfer.............................................. 626
10.5.2.4 Comparison ............................................... 627
10.5.2.5 Data search ............................................... 630
10.5.2.6 Bit operation .............................................. 630
10.5.2.7 Code conversion........................................ 631
10.5.2.8 Operation instruction ................................. 633
10.5.2.9 CNC functions ........................................... 635
10.5.2.10 Program control ......................................... 636
10.5.2.11 Rotation control ......................................... 638
10.5.3 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of
SUB No.)................................................................... 639
10.6 I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT NAMES ..................................... 642
11 ETHERNET .......................................................................... 645
11.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 645
11.2 ETHERNET MOUNTING LOCATIONS ................................... 645
11.3 LIST OF ETHERNET-RELATED SCREENS ........................... 646
11.3.1 Setting and Maintenance (SYSTEM key) .................. 646
11.3.2 File Operation (PROG Key)....................................... 647
11.3.3 Error Message (MESSAGE Key)............................... 647
11.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET ........................................................ 648
11.4.1 Parameter Setting Screen ......................................... 648
11.4.2 FTP File Transfer Operation Screen.......................... 652
11.4.3 Maintenance Screen for Embedded Ethernet
Function .................................................................... 653
11.4.4 Log Screen of the Embedded Ethernet Function ....... 657
11.5 ETHERNET OPTIONAL BOARD............................................. 660
11.5.1 Parameter Setting Screen ......................................... 660
11.5.2 Fast Data Server Operation Screen .......................... 667
11.5.3 Machine Remote Diagnosis Operation Screens ........ 671
11.5.4 Maintenance Screen (for Data Server Function)........ 673
11.5.5 Maintenance Screen ................................................. 675
11.5.6 Error Message Screen .............................................. 678
11.6 TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................. 681
11.6.1 Confirmation of Connection with the Hub Unit ........... 681
11.6.2 Confirmation of Each Parameter Setting ................... 682
11.6.3 Confirmation of Communications Based on the Ping
Command.................................................................. 682
12 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION..................... 683
12.1 SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................. 683
12.2 PARAMETERS........................................................................ 687
12.3 WARNING ............................................................................... 688
13 DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............................................... 689
13.1 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ......................................................... 689
13.1.1 Displaying Diagnosis Screen..................................... 689
13.2 LIST OF DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION (DGN) ......................... 689
13.2.1 Display of Causes of Instructions not Functioning ..... 689
13.2.2 State of TH Alarm...................................................... 689
13.2.3 Details of Serial Pulsecoder ...................................... 690
13.2.4 Details of Separate Serial Pulsecoder Alarms ........... 691
13.2.5 Details of Invalid Servo Parameter Alarms
(on the CNC Side) ..................................................... 691
13.2.6 Position Error Amount ............................................... 691
13.2.7 Machine Position ....................................................... 691
13.2.8 Reference Position Shift Function ............................. 691
13.2.9 Reference Counter .................................................... 691
13.2.10 Machine Coordinates on the Angular/Cartesian Axes 692
13.2.11 Servo Motor Temperature Information....................... 692
13.2.12 Cause that Sets Parameter APZ (No. 1815#4) to 0... 692
13.2.13 Details of Invalid Servo Parameter Setting Alarms
(on the Servo Side) ................................................... 693
13.2.14 Detailed Descriptions about Invalid Servo Parameter
Setting Alarms........................................................... 693
c-8
B-63947EN/01
c-9
Table of Contents
17 AC SPINDLE ........................................................................ 753
17.1 SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE......................................... 753
17.1.1 Overview of Spindle Control ...................................... 753
17.1.1.1 Method A of gear change for M series
(parameter SGB (No. 3705#2)=0) ............. 753
17.1.1.2 Method B of gear change for M series
(parameter SGB (No. 3705#2)=1) ............. 754
17.1.1.3 T series ..................................................... 754
17.1.2 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters................ 754
17.1.3 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen ........................... 755
17.1.3.1 Display method.......................................... 755
17.1.3.2 Spindle setting screen ............................... 756
17.1.3.3 Spindle tuning screen ................................ 757
17.1.3.4 Spindle monitor screen .............................. 758
17.1.3.5 Correspondence between operation mode
and parameters on spindle tuning screen .. 760
17.1.4 Warning Interface ...................................................... 762
17.1.5 Spindle Information Screen ....................................... 763
18 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION......................................... 767
18.1 SCREEN DISPLAY AT POWER ON ....................................... 767
18.1.1 Display until the CNC Starts ...................................... 767
18.1.2 IPL Display ................................................................ 767
18.1.3 System Label Check Error......................................... 768
18.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN DISPLAY ................... 768
18.2.1 Hardware Configuration Screen ................................ 769
18.2.2 Software Configuration Screen.................................. 770
18.3 CNC STATE DISPLAY ............................................................ 772
18.4 PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE SCREEN ................................ 775
18.4.1 Overview ................................................................... 775
18.4.1.1 Screen configuration.................................. 775
18.4.1.2 Procedure.................................................. 775
18.4.2 Screen Display and Setting ....................................... 775
18.4.2.1 Status screen display and setting .............. 776
18.4.2.2 Setting screen display and setting ............. 781
18.4.3 Registered Data Input/Output.................................... 783
18.4.3.1 Data output................................................ 784
18.4.3.2 Data input .................................................. 784
18.4.4 Parameter ................................................................. 784
18.4.5 Warning..................................................................... 785
18.5 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN ............................. 786
18.5.1 Overview ................................................................... 786
18.5.2 Screen Display and Operation................................... 786
18.5.2.1 Screen display........................................... 786
18.5.2.2 Edit operation ............................................ 787
18.5.2.3 Operation of soft keys................................ 788
18.5.2.4 Input/output of maintenance information.... 789
18.5.2.5 Half-size kana input ................................... 790
18.5.3 Parameter ................................................................. 791
18.5.4 Warning..................................................................... 792
19 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION ............................................... 793
19.1 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA ............................................. 793
19.1.1 Setting Parameters for Input/Output .......................... 793
19.1.2 Inputting/Outputting Data........................................... 794
19.1.2.1 Confirming the parameters required for
data output ................................................ 795
19.1.2.2 Outputting CNC parameters ...................... 796
19.1.2.3 Outputting pitch error compensation
amount ...................................................... 796
19.1.2.4 Outputting custom macro variable values .. 796
19.1.2.5 Outputting tool compensation amount ....... 796
19.1.2.6 Outputting part program............................. 796
19.1.2.7 Inputting CNC parameters ......................... 797
19.1.2.8 Inputting pitch error compensation amount 798
19.1.2.9 Inputting custom macro variable values..... 798
19.1.2.10 Inputting tool compensation amount .......... 799
c-10
B-63947EN/01
c-11
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.1 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS
The setting and display units are shown in Subsections 1.1.1 to 1.1.8.
1
B-63947EN/01
2
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.1.5 15" LCD CNC Display Panel
3
B-63947EN/01
Edit keys
Uppercase/
lowercase
switch key
Cancel
(CAN) key
AUX key
CTRL key
ALT key
TAB key
Edit keys
Uppercase/
lowercase
switch key
Cancel
(CAN) key
AUX key
CTRL key
ALT key
TAB key
Reset key
Address keys
Uppercase/
lowercase Numeric
switch key keys
AUX key
Page change keys Cursor move keys Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key
(Page keys) (Cursor keys)
4
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.1.8 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)
- Unit with machining center system
Address/numeric keys
Help key
Page change keys
(Page keys)
Reset key
Edit keys
Address/numeric keys
Help key
Page change keys
(Page keys)
Reset key
Edit keys
5
B-63947EN/01
Help key Press this button to use the help function when
2 uncertain about the operation of an MDI key (help
function).
The soft keys have various functions, according
3 Soft keys to the Applications. The soft key functions are
displayed on the display unit.
Address and
numeric keys Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric,
4
and other characters.
: DELETE
6
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
No. Name Explanation
There are four different cursor move keys.
: This key is used to move the cursor to
the right or in the forward direction. The
cursor is moved in short units in the
forward direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor to
Cursor move keys
the left or in the reverse direction. The
(Cursor keys)
cursor is moved in short units in the
10 reverse direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in a
downward or forward direction. The
cursor is moved in large units in the
forward direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in an
upward or reverse direction. The cursor
is moved in large units in the reverse
direction.
Two kinds of page change keys are described
Page change keys below.
(Page keys)
: This key is used to changeover the page
11
on the screen in the forward direction.
: This key is used to changeover the page
on the screen in the reverse direction.
Uppercase/
lowercase switch Press this key to switch between uppercase and
12 key lowercase when entering alphabetic characters.
PC function key
These keys are used with the personal computer
13
function of the 300i/300is, 310i/310is, 320i/320is.
7
B-63947EN/01
Explanation
- 15” LCD/MDI soft key configuration
The 15” LCD panel has 12 soft keys horizontally and 9 soft keys 1
vertically.
As shown below, the 8 vertical soft keys and the lowermost key are used
as chapter selection soft keys. By pressing each of these keys, the
screen (chapter) belonging to each function can be selected. The
horizontal 12 soft keys are used to perform operations on the screen
selected with a vertical soft key.
For an LCD display with a touch panel, touch a soft key on the screen to
select it.
In this manual, the descriptions below assume a 10.4" LCD display panel
with 12 soft keys.
8
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.2 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS
The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to be
displayed. When a soft key (section select soft key) is pressed
immediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to
the selected function can be selected.
2 When one of the chapter selection soft keys is pressed, the screen
of the chapter is displayed. If the soft key of a desired chapter is not
displayed, press the continuous menu key.
In a chapter, a further choice may be made from multiple chapters.
Auxiliary menu
9
B-63947EN/01
Program screen
The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and
the function of each screen are described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
10
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Offset/setting screen
The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and
the function of each screen are described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
11
B-63947EN/01
System screen
The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and
1
the function of each screen are described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(OPRT) +
Page 9
12
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Chapter
No. Description
menu
(12) PMC Selects the screen related to ladder display/editing.
LADDER
(13) PMC Displays the screen for displaying/editing data other
CONFIG than ladders that makes up a sequence program and for
setting the PMC function.
(16) MCNG Displays the screen for setting the parameter set for
TUNING emphasis on speed (LV1) or emphasis on precision
(LV10).
(17) ALL IO Selects the screen for data I/O.
(18) ALL IO Selects the screen for data input to and output from the
memory card.
(19) OPEHIS Selects the screen for displaying the history of
operations performed by the operator and issued
alarms.
(21) COLOR Selects the screen for setting colors to be used on the
screen.
(22) MAINTE Selects the screen for setting maintenance items to be
managed periodically.
(23) M-INFO Selects the screen for displaying information about
maintenance performed.
(24) W.DGNS Selects the screen for displaying data such as servo
positional deviation values, torque values, machine
signals, and so forth as graphs.
(27) FSSB Selects the screen for making settings related to the
high-speed serial servo bus (FSSB: Fanuc Serial Servo
Bus).
(28) PRMTUN Selects the screen for setting parameters necessary for
start-up and tuning.
(29) P.MATE Selects the screen for displaying Power Mate CNC
MGR. maneger.
(31) EMBEDD Selects the screen for making settings related to the
ED embedded Ethernet (embedded port).
(32) PCMCIA Selects the screen for making settings related to the
LAN embedded Ethernet (PCMCIA Ethernet card).
(33) ETHNET Selects the screen for making settings related to the fast
BOARD Ethernet/fast data server.
(34) PROFI-BUS Selects the screen for making settings related to the
MST profibus master function.
(37) M CODE Selects the screen for setting an M code group.
(39) PROFI Selects the screen for setting 3-dimensional error
SLAVE compensation data.
(46) DUAL Selects the screen for displaying dual check safety
CHECK diagnostic data.
(47) R.TIME Selects the screen for making settings related to the
MACRO real-time custom macro function.
13
B-63947EN/01
Message screen
The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and
1
the function of each screen are described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Graphic screen
The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and
the function of each screen are described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
14
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.3 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
15
B-63947EN/01
Explanation
- Display including compensation values
M
Parameters DAL, DAC (No. 3104#6, #7) can be used to select whether
the displayed values include tool length compensation and tool radius
compensation.
T
16
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.3.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate
System
Displays the current position of the tool in a relative coordinate system
based on the coordinates (see Explanation) set by the operator. The
current position changes as the tool moves. The increment system is
used as the unit for numeric values.
The title at the top of the screen indicates that relative coordinates are
used.
Display procedure for the current position screen with the relative coordinate
system
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [REL].
Explanation
- Setting the relative coordinates
The current position of the tool in the relative coordinate system can be
reset to 0 or preset to a specified value as follows:
17
B-63947EN/01
Parameters DRL, DRC (No. 3104#4, #5) can be used to select whether
the displayed values include tool length compensation and tool radius
compensation.
18
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.3.3 Overall Position Display
Displays the following positions on a screen: Current positions of the tool
in the workpiece coordinate system, relative coordinate system, and
machine coordinate system, and the remaining distance. The relative
coordinates can also be set on this screen. See Subsection 1.3.2,
“Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System” for the procedure.
Procedure for displaying overall position display screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [ALL].
Explanation
- Coordinate display
The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are
displayed at the same time:
• Current position in the relative coordinate system (relative coordinate)
• Current position in the workpiece coordinate system (absolute
coordinate)
• Current position in the machine coordinate system (machine
coordinate)
• Distance to go (distance to go)
19
B-63947EN/01
- Distance to go
The distance remaining is displayed in the MEMORY or MDI mode. The
distance the tool is yet to be moved in the current block is displayed. 1
- Machine coordinate system
The least command increment is used as the unit for values displayed in
the machine coordinate system. However, the least input increment can
be used by setting parameter MCN (No. 3104#0).
- Resetting the relative coordinates
The total position display screen also supports the resetting of the
relative coordinates to 0 or presetting of them to specified values. See
the procedure for resetting the relative coordinates described in
Subsection 1.3.2, “Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System”.
Explanation
- Data to be displayed
The following types of data are displayed at the same time:
• Distance traveled due to a handle interrupt in input units (input unit)
• Distance traveled due to a handle interrupt in output units (output unit)
• Position in relative coordinates (relative coordinates)
• Remaining distance to go in the current block (remaining distance to
go)
- Input unit
The distance traveled due to a handle interrupt is displayed in the least
input increment.
- Output unit
The distance traveled due to a handle interrupt is displayed in the least
command increment.
- Relative coordinates
Not related to the distance traveled due to a handle interrupt.
- Distance to go
Not related to the distance traveled due to a handle interrupt.
The distance traveled due to a handle interrupt is cleared upon
completion of the manual reference position return for each axis.
20
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- Display for five or more axes
The display on a system with five or more axes is the same as the overall
position display.
Explanation
- Display of the servo axes
Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled
axes of the path can be displayed. One screen displays load meters for
up to five axes at a time. By pressing the [MONITOR] soft key, load
meters for the 6th axis and up are displayed.
21
B-63947EN/01
The following table lists the correspondence between clutch and gear
selection signals CTH1A and CTH2A, used to determine the gear being
used, and parameters:
Serial spindle
CTH1A CTH2A Parameter
specification
=No.3741 (Maximum spindle speed with
0 0 HIGH
gear 1)
=No.3742 (Maximum spindle speed with
0 1 MEDIUM HIGH
gear 2)
=No.3743 (Maximum spindle speed with
1 0 MEDIUM LOW
gear 3)
=No.3744 (Maximum spindle speed with
1 1 LOW
gear 4)
The speed of the spindle motor and spindle can be displayed, during
operation monitoring, only for the first serial spindle and the spindle
switching axis for the first serial spindle. It cannot be displayed for the
second spindle.
- Color of graph
If the value of a load meter exceeds 100%, the bar graph turns purple on
a color LCD.
22
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.4 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
(MEMORY MODE)
This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key
. The screens include a program editing screen, program folder list
display screen, and screens for displaying the command states of the
program currently being executed.
1. Program screen
2. Program folder screen
3. Next block display screen
4. Program check screen
On the program screen, you edit the program that is currently selected,
and display the block that is currently executed during program operation.
In MDI mode, you also edit an MDI operation program, and display the
block that is currently executed.
Fig. 1.4.1 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed
23
B-63947EN/01
Explanation
- Program display
The program currently being executed is displayed.
The block being executed is displayed in reverse video.
- Current position display
The current position in the relative coordinate system, workpiece
coordinate system, and machine coordinate system, and the remaining
amount of travel are displayed.
- Modal G codes
Up to 24 modal G codes are displayed.
24
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.4.3 Next Block Display Screen
Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed
next.
Procedure for displaying the next block display screen
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press chapter selection soft key [NEXT].
The G codes, addresses, command values specified in the block
currently being executed and the next block are displayed.
25
B-63947EN/01
- Word editing
Editing operations such as text insertion, modification, and deletion, and
cursor movements are performed on a word-by-word basis.
26
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- Character editing
Program editing operations and cursor movements are performed on a
character-by-character basis as with a general text editor.
Text is input directly to the cursor position instead of using the key input
buffer.
27
B-63947EN/01
28
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.6 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
29
B-63947EN/01
30
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Explanation
- Decimal point input
A decimal point can be used when entering a compensation value.
- Other method
An external input/output device can be used to input or output a tool
radius compensation value. See Chapter III-8 “Data Input/Output” in the
User’s Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System).
Tool length compensation values can be set using the following
functions described in subsequent subsections: direct input of tool offset
value measured, direct input of tool offset value measured B, and
counter input of offset value.
- Number of tool compensation values
16 groups are provided for tool compensation. The number of groups
can be optionally extended to 32, 64, or 999. For the multi-path control,
the above number of groups can be used for each path. Tool geometry
compensation or wear compensation can be selected for each group.
- Disabling entry of compensation values
In some cases, tool wear compensation or tool geometry compensation
values cannot be input because of the settings in parameters WOF, GOF
(No. 3290#0, #1). The input of tool compensation values from the MDI
can be inhibited for a specified range of offset numbers. The first offset
number for which the input of a value is inhibited is set in parameter (No.
3294). The number of offset numbers, starting from the specified first
number, for which the input of a value is inhibited is set in parameter (No.
3295).
Consecutive input values are set as follows:
1) When values are input for offset numbers, starting from one for
which input is not inhibited to one for which input is inhibited, a
warning is issued and values are set only for those offset numbers
for which input is not inhibited.
2) When values are input for offset numbers, starting from one for
which input is inhibited to one for which input is not inhibited, a
warning is issued and no values are set.
- Displaying radius and TIP
The radius and TIP are not displayed if the tool nose radius
compensation option is not displayed.
- Changing offset values during automatic operation
When offset values have been changed during automatic operation, bit 4
(LGT) and bit 6 (LWM) of parameter 5002 can be used for specifying
whether new offset values become valid in the next move command or in
the next T code command.
Fig. 1.6.1 (a)
When geometry When geometry compensation
compensation values and values and wear compensation
LGT LWM
wear compensation values values are not separately
are separately specified specified
Become valid in the next T Become valid in the next T code
0 0
code block block
Become valid in the next T Become valid in the next T code
1 0
code block block
Become valid in the next T Become valid in the next move
0 1
code block command
Become valid in the next Become valid in the next move
1 1
move command command
31
B-63947EN/01
32
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys
.
5 Enter a new value and press soft key [INPUT].
Explanation
- PARAMETER WRITE
Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
- TV CHECK
Setting to perform TV check.
0 : No TV check
1 : Perform TV check
- PUNCH CODE
Setting code when data is output through reader/puncher interface.
0 : EIA code output
1 : ISO code output
- INPUT UNIT
Setting a program input unit, inch or metric system
0 : Metric
1 : Inch
- I/O CHANNEL
Using channel of reader/puncher interface.
0 : Channel 0
1 : Channel 1
2 : Channel 2
- SEQUENCE NO.
Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence
number or not at program edit in the EDIT mode.
0 : Does not perform automatic sequence number insertion.
1 : Perform automatic sequence number insertion.
- PROGRAM FORMAT
Setting of whether to use the Series 15 format.
0: Uses the standard format.
1: Uses the Series 15 format.
For the Series 15 format, refer to Chapter II-6, “Memory Operation by
Series 15 Format” in the User's Manual (Lathe System) or Chapter II-7,
“Memory Operation by Series 15 Format” in the User's Manual
(Machining Center System).
- SEQUENCE STOP
Setting the sequence number with which the operation stops for the
sequence number comparison and stop function and the number of the
program to which the sequence number belongs
- MIRROR IMAGE
Setting of mirror image ON/OFF for each axis.
0 : Mirror image off
1 : Mirror image on
- Others
Page key or can also be pressed to display the SETTING
(TIMER) screen. See Subsection 12.3.3, “Displaying and Setting Run
Time, Parts Count, and Time” in the User's Manual (Machining Center
System) for this screen.
33
B-63947EN/01
3 The screen for displaying the workpiece origin offset values consists
of two or more pages. Display a desired page in either of the
following two ways:
• Press the page key or .
• Enter the workpiece coordinate system number (0 : external
workpiece origin offset, 1 to 6: workpiece coordinate systems
G54 to G59, P1 to P48 : workpiece coordinate systems G54.1
P1 to G54.1 P48, P1 to P300 : workpiece coordinate systems
G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and press operation selection soft
key [NO.SRH].
4 Turn off the data protection key to enable writing.
5 Move the cursor to the workpiece origin offset to be changed.
6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press soft key
[INPUT]. The entered value is specified in the workpiece origin
offset value. Or, by entering a desired value with numeric keys and
pressing soft key [+INPUT], the entered value can be added to the
previous offset value.
7 Repeat 5 and 6 to change other offset values.
8 Turn on the data protection key to disable writing.
34
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.6.4 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value
Measured
This function is used to compensate for the difference between the
programmed workpiece coordinate system and the actual workpiece
coordinate system. The measured offset for the origin of the workpiece
coordinate system can be input on the screen such that the command
values match the actual dimensions.
Selecting the new coordinate system matches the programmed
coordinate system with the actual coordinate system.
Procedure for direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured
Procedure
Y y
Surface A
Programmed workpiece
origin α
Surface B
O'
X
New offset
x
O β
Origin
Previous offset
35
B-63947EN/01
Limitation
- Consecutive input
Offsets for two or more axes cannot be input at the same time. 1
- During program execution
This function cannot be used while a program is being executed.
3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the
following methods:
• Enter the variable number and press soft key [NO.SRH].
• Move the cursor to the variable number to set by pressing page
keys and/or and cursor keys , , ,
and/or .
4 Enter data with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT].
5 To set a relative coordinate in a variable, press address key ,
36
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
When the significant number of digits is 8 (with parameter F16 (No.
6008#0) set to 1):
Variable value range Variable value indication
0 < Variable value < +0.0000001 +Underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.0000001 -Underflow
Variable value > 99999999 +Overflow
Variable value < -99999999 -Overflow
37
B-63947EN/01
or .
38
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Explanation
- Valid operations
The valid operations on the software operator's panel are shown below.
Whether to use each group can be chosen using parameter No. 7200.
Those groups that are not used are not displayed on the software
operator's panel.
Group 1 : Mode selection
Group 2 : Selection of jog feed axis, Manual rapid traverse
Group 3 : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of
manual pulse magnification
Group 4 : Jog federate, federate override, rapid traverse override
Group 5 : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group 6 : Protect key
Group 7 : Feed hold
- Screens on which jog feed is valid
When the LCD indicates other than the software operator's panel screen
and self-diagnosis screen, jog feed is not conducted even if the arrow
key is pushed.
- Jog feed and arrow keys
The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set
with parameters (Nos. 7210 to 7217).
- General purpose switches
For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by
machine tool builder.
39
B-63947EN/01
40
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and
press soft key [INPUT]. The parameter is set to the entered value
and the value is displayed.
6 Set 0 (DISABLE) for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing.
41
B-63947EN/01
Z
Z
Y Program Y
X X
Coordinate system
Part drawing CNC
Tool
Command
Tool
Z
Y
Workpiece
X
Machine tool
X X
Program
Z
Z
Coordinate system
Part drawing CNC
Command
Workpiece
Machine tool
42
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Explanation
- Coordinate system
The following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations:
(See Chapter II-7, “Coordinate System” in the User’s Manual (Common
to Lathe System/Machining Center System).)
1 Coordinate system on part drawing
The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the
program data, the coordinate values on this coordinate system are
used.
2 Coordinate system specified by the CNC
The coordinate system is prepared on the actual machine tool table.
This can be achieved by programming the distance from the current
position of the tool to the zero point of the coordinate system to be
set.
Y
Workpiece
X
Table
X X
Workpiece
Z Z
Chuck
Fig. 1.7.3 (c) Coordinate system specified by CNC and coordinate system on
part drawing
43
B-63947EN/01
To set the two coordinate systems at the same position, simple methods
shall be used according to workpiece shape, the number of machinings.
Fixed distance
Program
origin
X
Bring the tool center to the workpiece standard point.
And set the coordinate system specified by CNC at this position.
Program origin
Jig
Meet the tool center to the reference position. And set the coordinate
system specified by CNC at this position. (Jig shall be mounted on the
predetermined point from the reference position.)
Pallet
Jig
Workpiece
44
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
T
Workpiece
Z
60 40
40
150
- Coordinate system on
lathe as specified by CNC
X
Chuck
Workpiece
Program origin Z
When the coordinate system on the part drawing and the coordinate
system specified by the CNC are set at the same position, the
program origin can be set on the chuck face.
60 Workpiece 30
Z
30
80
100
- Coordinate system on
lathe as specified by CNC
Chuck X
Workpiece
Z
Program origin
When the coordinate system on the part drawing and the coordinate
system specified by the CNC are set at the same position, the
program origin can be set on the end face of the workpiece.
45
B-63947EN/01
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Reference
position
-1
Compensation magnification
parameter (No. 3623)
-2
Compensation number parameter for Compensation interval
the compensation point having the parameter (No. 3624)
smallest value (No. 3621)
Compensation position 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
number
Compensation value to be set -3 +1 +1 +1 +2 -1 -3
46
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
- Bi-directional pitch error compensation
The bi-directional pitch error compensation function allows independent
pitch error compensation in different travel directions. (When the
movement is reversed, compensation is automatically carried out as in a
backlash.)
To use this function, specify pitch error compensation for each travel
direction, that is, separately for the positive and negative directions of a
movement.
When using bi-directional pitch error compensation (setting the
parameter BDP (No. 3605#0) to 1), specify the following parameters in
addition to the pitch error compensation parameter.
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative end
(for travel in the positive direction, for each axis): Parameter No.
3621
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive end (for
travel in the positive direction, for each axis): Parameter No. 3622
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative end
(for travel in the negative direction, for each axis): Parameter 3626
• Pitch error compensation in the reference position when moving to
the reference position from opposite to the reference position return
direction (for each axis): Parameter No. 3627
Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error compensation data
Procedure
1 Set the following parameters:
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the reference
position (for each axis): Parameter No. 3620
• Number of the pitch error compensation point having the
smallest value (for each axis): Parameter No. 3621
• Number of the pitch error compensation point having the
largest value (for each axis): Parameter No. 3622
• Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis):
Parameter No. 3623
• Interval of the pitch error compensation points (for each axis):
Parameter No. 3624
• Travel distance per revolution of pitch error compensation of
the rotary axis type (for each axis): Parameter No. 3625
When using bi-directional pitch error compensation (setting the
parameter BDP (No. 3605#0) to 1), specify the following parameters
in addition to the pitch error compensation parameter.
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative
end (for travel in the positive direction, for each axis):
Parameter No. 3621
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive
end (for travel in the positive direction, for each axis):
Parameter No. 3622
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative
end (for travel in the negative direction, for each axis):
Parameter No. 3626
• Pitch error compensation in the reference position when
moving to the reference position from opposite to the reference
position return direction (for each axis): Parameter No. 3627
2 Press function key .
47
B-63947EN/01
, and .
5 Enter a value with numeric keys and press the [INPUT] soft key.
48
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.8 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
49
B-63947EN/01
In this case, display the alarm screen by following the steps below.
1 Press function key .
2 Press the chapter selection soft key [ALARM].
3 Pressing the soft key [ALARM] changes the screen display to the
"DETAIL" screen (or the alarm screen selected previously), and the
soft keys [DETAIL] and [ALL PATH] appears.
• Pressing the soft key [DETAIL] displays the "DETAIL" screen.
• Pressing the soft key [ALL PATH] displays the "ALL PATH"
screen.
If the number of paths is 1, pressing the soft key [ALARM] displays
the "DETAIL" screen, but the soft key [ALARM] indication remains
unchanged.
4 You can change pages by using the page keys.
- Releasing alarm
The cause of an alarm can be determined from the error code, number,
and associated message. To release the alarm, generally correct the
cause, then press the key.
- Error code and number
The type of an alarm is indicated by an error code and number.
Example: PS0010, SV0004, etc.
For details, see Chapter 8, "Alarm List".
50
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.8.2 Alarm History Display
Up to 60 alarms (in 10 screen pages) issued by the CNC including the
latest alarm are stored and displayed on the screen.
The display procedure is explained below.
Alarm history display
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press the chapter selection soft key [HISTRY].
An alarm history is displayed.
The following information is displayed:
<1> Date and time of alarm issuance
<2> Alarm type
<3> Alarm number
<4> Alarm message (sometimes not displayed depending on the
alarm)
<5> Page No.
3 You can change pages by using the page keys.
51
B-63947EN/01
To return to the original screen, press the key or the function key
again.
From the initial menu screen of the help function, you can select each
help screen.
Operation
52
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
• Soft key [SELECT]
- Enter a menu number in the key input buffer and press soft key
[SELECT].
- Select a menu with the cursor and press soft key [SELECT].
• key
- Enter a menu number in the key input buffer and press the
key.
Fig. 1.9.2 (a) Alarm detail screen displayed if an alarm has been generated
If all alarms are reset, the alarm detail screen changes to the display
when no alarm has been generated (Fig. 1.9.2 (b)).
53
B-63947EN/01
Fig. 1.9.2 (b) Alarm detail screen displayed if no alarm has been generated
Operation
54
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.9.3 Operation Method Screen
1 On the initial help menu of the help function, you can display the
operation method menu screen by performing either of the
following:
• Press soft key [OPERATION].
• Select "2. OPERATION METHOD" with the cursor and press
key or soft key [SELECT].
• Enter 2 in the key input buffer and press key or soft key
[SELECT].
Operation
On the operation method menu screen and on an operation method
screen, you can perform the following:
• Soft key [SELECT]
• key
Enter the item number of the desired operation method in the key
input buffer and press key or soft key [SELECT], and the
corresponding operation method screen is displayed.
On the operation method menu screen, you can select an item
number with the cursor.
55
B-63947EN/01
• Enter 3 in the key input buffer and press key or soft key
[SELECT].
On the table of parameters screen, you can switch between pages
by using the cursor keys and or the page keys
Operation
56
2 OPERATION LIST
(1) Reset
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW = 1 key
Operating time [(OPRT)] → [RUNPRE] →
[EXEC]
Number of [(OPRT)] → [PTSPRE] →
machined parts [EXEC]
Alarm 100 "RESET while pressing
(SW0100) "CAN"
57
B-63947EN/01
58
2 OPERATION LIST
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW = 1 key
Offset EDIT or [OFFSET] → [(OPRT)] →
emergency [PUNCH] (→ File name) →
stop [EXEC]
Custom macro EDIT or [OFFSET] → →
variable emergency
[MACRO] → [(OPRT)] →
stop
→ [PUNCH] (→ File
name) → [EXEC]
All programs [(OPRT)] → →
[PUNCH] → [EXEC]
One program [(OPRT)] → →
[PUNCH] → [P SET, F SET]
→ [EXEC]
(5) Search
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW = 1 key
Program No. "O" + Program No. →
[PROGRM SEARCH] or
[PROGRM SEARCH] → "O" +
Program No. →
[PROGRM NAME]
Main program [PROGRM SEARCH] →
[MAIN SRCH]
Sequence No., [SEARCH] → Sequence No.,
Address + Word, Address + Word, Address →
Address only [↑ SEARCH, ↓ SEARCH] →
[↑ SEARCH, ↓ SEARCH]
Line [LINE SEARCH] → [LINE
NUMBER (character mode),
TOP, BOTTOM (Word mode,
character mode)]
Offset No. [OFFSET] → Offset No. →
[NO.SRH]
Diagnosis No. [DGNOS] → Diagnosis No. →
[NO.SRH]
Parameter No. [PARAM] → Parameter No. →
[NO.SRH]
59
B-63947EN/01
60
2 OPERATION LIST
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW = 1 key
Character EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
overwriting → [INPUT MODE] →
Overwrite mode is entered
[PROGRM] (→ Search for
character to overwrite) → New
character
Character string EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
replacement [REPLCE] → Enter character
string in search/replace dialog
box → [↑ SEARCH,
↓ SEARCH] → [REPLCE,
REPLCE ALL]
Character EDIT [PROGRM] (→ Search for
deletion character to delete) →
“DELETE”
Copying of EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
character string in [SELECT] → Select range →
specified range [COPY] → [PASTE]
Movement of EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
character string in [SELECT] → Select range →
specified range [CUT] → [PASTE]
Undoing EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
[UNDO]
Program insertion EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
→ [INSERT] →
[CURSOR POSITION,
BOTTOM] → Enter program
name → [EXEC]
Editor change EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
→ [CHANGE EDITOR]
Program memory [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] →
condensation [PROGRM CNDENS]
61
B-63947EN/01
(8) Playback
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW = 1 key
NC data input TJOG, Move tool → "X" , "Y" or "Z" →
THND "INSERT" → NC data → 2
"INSERT" → "EOB" →
"INSERT"
(9) Clear
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key
Memory all clear At "RESET" and
power-up "DELETE"
RAM for PMC ladder storage At X and O
(Ladder programs are power-up
cleared from the memory for
execution. The previous
state is restored when the
power is turned on again.)
PMC nonvolatile memory Z and O
(PMC parameters and so
forth are cleared.)
62
2 OPERATION LIST
(11) Display
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW = 1 key
Display of [FOLDER]
program memory
used and
contents of
current folder
Display of MEM Currently executed program in
specified value or memory
MDI [PROGRM]
Specified value under
execution, next specified value
to be executed, and current
position
[NEXT]
Currently executed program in
memory and current position
[CHECK]
Display of current Display of position in workpiece
position coordinate system
[ABS]
Display of position in relative
coordinate system
[REL]
Overall position display
[ALL]
Operating →[MONITOR]
monitor screen
Alarm display When an alarm is issued
[ALARM]
Operator When there is a message to
message display the operator from the outside
[MSG]
Alarm history [HISTRY]
display
Parameter setting [PARAM]
display
System [SYSTEM]
configuration
Servo information [SYSTEM] → [SERVO INFO]
63
B-63947EN/01
64
2 OPERATION LIST
(13) Help function
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW = 1 key
Displaying
INITIAL MENU
screen
Displaying [ALARM] → Alarm No. →
ALARM DETAIL [SELECT]
screen
Displaying [OPERATION] →
OPERATION Item No. of operation method
METHOD screen → [SELECT]
Displaying [PARAMETER]
PARAMETER
TABLE screen
(16) BOOT
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW = 1 key
Displaying At and the soft key to its left
system monitor power-
screen up
65
B-63947EN/01
66
3 G CODE
A number following address G determines the meaning of the command
for the concerned block.
G codes are divided into the following two types.
Type Meaning
The G code is effective only in the block in which it is
One-shot G code
specified.
The G code is effective until another G code of the same
Modal G code
group is specified.
[Example]
G01 and G00 are modal G codes in group 01.
G01 X_ ;
Z_ ; G01 is effective in this range.
X_ ;
G00 Z_ ; G00 is effective in this range.
X_ ;
G01 X_ ;
:
T
There are three G code systems in the lathe system : A, B, and C (Table
3.1). Select a G code system using the parameters GSB and GSC (No.
3401#6 and #7). To use G code system B or C, the corresponding option
is needed. Generally, This Handbook describes the use of G code
system A, except when the described item can use only G code system
B or C. In such cases, the use of G code system B or C is described.
Explanation
1. When the clear state (parameter CLR (No. 3402#6)) is set at
power-up or reset, the modal G codes are placed in the states
described below.
(1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with (*) as
indicated in Tables 3.1 and 3.2.
(2) G20 and G21 remain unchanged when the clear state is set at
power-up or reset.
(3) Which status G22 or G23 at power on is set by parameter G23
(No. 3402#7). However, G22 and G23 remain unchanged when
the clear state is set at reset.
(4) The user can select G00 or G01 by setting parameter G01 (No.
3402#0).
(5) The user can select G90 or G91 by setting parameter G91 (No.
3402#3).
When G code system B or C is used in the lathe system, setting
parameter G91 (No. 3402#3) determines which code, either
G90 or G91, is effective.
(6) In the machining center system, the user can select G17, G18,
or G19 by setting parameters G18 and G19 (No. 3402#1 and
#2).
2. G codes other than G10 and G11 are one-shot G codes in group 00.
3. When a G code not listed in the G code list is specified, or a G code
that has no corresponding option is specified, alarm PS0010 occurs.
4. Multiple G codes can be specified in the same block if each G code
belongs to a different group. If multiple G codes that belong to the
same group are specified in the same block, only the last G code
specified is valid.
5. If a G code belonging to group 01 is specified in a canned cycle for
drilling, the canned cycle for drilling is cancelled. This means that
the same state set by specifying G80 is set. Note that the G codes in
group 01 are not affected by a G code specifying a canned cycle for
drilling.
6. G codes are indicated by group.
7. The group of G60 is switched according to the setting of the
parameter MDL (No. 5431#0). (When the MDL bit is set to 0, the 00
group is selected. When the MDL bit is set to 1, the 01 group is
selected.)
67
B-63947EN/01
68
3 G CODE
3.1 G CODE LIST IN THE MACHINING CENTER
SYSTEM
Table 3.1 G code list
G code Group Function
G00 (*) Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01 (*) Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
Circular interpolation CW or
G02
helical interpolation CW
01 Circular interpolation CCW or
G03
helical interpolation CCW
G02.2, G03.2 Involute interpolation CW/CCW
G02.3, G03.3 Exponential interpolation CW/CCW
G02.4, G03.4 Three-dimensional coordinate conversion CW/CCW
G04 Dwell
AI contour control (high-precision contour control
G05
compatible command)
00
AI contour control / Nano smoothing /
G05.1
Smooth interpolation
G05.4 HRV3,4 on/off
G06.2 01 NURBS interpolation
G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical interpolation
AI contour control (advanced preview control
G08
compatible command)
G09 Exact stop
00
G10 Programmable data input
G10.6 Tool retract and recover
Programmable switching of diameter/radius
G10.9
specification
G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
21
G13.1 (*) Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
G12.4 Clockwise continuous circular motion
00
G13.4 Counterclockwise continuous circular motion
G15 (*) Polar coordinates command cancel
17
G16 Polar coordinates command
G17 (*) XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 (*) 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G19 (*) YpZp plane selection
G20 (G70) Inch input
06
G21 (G71) Metrci input
G22 (*) Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 Stored stroke check function off
G25 (*) Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
19
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Automatic return to reference position
00
G29 Movement from reference position
G30 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference position return
69
B-63947EN/01
70
3 G CODE
G code Group Function
G50.1 (*) Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G50.2 Polygon turning cancel
31
G51.2 Polygon turning
G52 Local coordinate system setting
G53 00 Machine coordinate system setting
G53.1 Tool axis direction control
G54 (G54.1) (*) Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
14
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection
G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection
G54.2 23 Rotary table dynamic fixture offset
G54.4 33 Work setting error compensation
G60 00 Single direction positioning
G61 Exact stop mode
G62 Automatic corner override
15
G63 Tapping mode
G64 (*) Cutting mode
G65 00 Macro call
G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 12 Macro modal call B
G67 (*) Macro modal call A/B cancel
Coordinate system rotation start or 3-dimensional
G68
coordinate conversion mode on
Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional
G69 (*)
16 coordinate conversion mode off
G68.2 Tilted working plane command
Tilted working plane specification in tool axis
G68.3
direction
G72.1 Figure copy (rotation copy)
00
G72.2 Figure copy (linear copy)
G73 Peck drilling cycle
G74 Left-handed tapping cycle
G76 09 Fine boring cycle
Canned cycle cancel /
G80 (*)
Electronic gear box: synchronization cancellation
G80.4 34 Electronic gear box: synchronization cancellation
Electronic gear box 2 pair:
G80.5 24
synchronization cancellation
Drilling cycle or spot boring cycle /
G81 09
Electronic gear box: synchronization start
G81.1 00 Chopping
G81.4 34 Electronic gear box: synchronization start
G81.5 24 Electronic gear box 2 pair: synchronization start
G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
09
G83 Peck drilling cycle
71
B-63947EN/01
72
3 G CODE
3.2 G CODE LIST IN THE LATHE SYSTEM
Table 3.2 G code list
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G00 (*) G00 (*) G00 (*) Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
Circular interpolation CW or
G02 G02 G02
helical interpolation CW
Circular interpolation CCW or
G03 G03 G03
helical interpolation CCW
G02.2 G02.2 G02.2 Involute interpolation CW
01
G02.3 G02.3 G02.3 Exponential interpolation CW
Three-dimensional coordinate
G02.4 G02.4 G02.4
conversion CW
G03.2 G03.2 G03.2 Involute interpolation CCW
G03.3 G03.3 G03.3 Exponential interpolation CCW
Three-dimensional coordinate
G03.4 G03.4 G03.4
conversion CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
AI contour control (command
G05 G05 G05 compatible with high precision contour
00 control)
AI contour control / Nano smoothing /
G05.1 G05.1 G05.1
Smooth interpolation
G05.4 G05.4 G05.4 HRV3, 4 on/off
G06.2 G06.2 G06.2 01 NURBS interpolation
G07 G07 G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 G07.1 G07.1
Cylindrical interpolation
(G107) (G107) (G107)
G08 G08 G08 Advanced preview control
G09 G09 G09 Exact stop
00
G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input
G10.6 G10.6 G10.6 Tool retract and recover
Programmable switching of
G10.9 G10.9 G10.9
diameter/radius specification
G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G112) (G112) (G112)
G13.1 G13.1 G13.1 21
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel
(G113) (G113) (G113)
mode
(*) (*) (*)
G15 G15 G15 Polar coordinate command cancel
24
G16 G16 G16 Polar coordinate command
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 (*) G18 (*) G18 (*) 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 G20 G70 Inch input
06
G21 G21 G71 Metrci input
G22 (*) G22 (*) G22 (*) Stored stroke check function on
09
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
73
B-63947EN/01
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G25 (*) G25 (*) G25 (*) Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
08
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position 3
G29 G29 G29 Movement from reference position
74
3 G CODE
G code system
Group Function
A B C
3-dimensional cutter compensation :
G42.4 G42.4 G42.4 right (type 1) (FS16i-compatible
command)
75
B-63947EN/01
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G64 G64 G64 15 Cutting mode
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro call
G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 12 Macro modal call B 3
G67 (*) G67 (*) G67 (*) Macro modal call A/B cancel
Mirror image on for double turret or
G68 G68 G68 04
balance cutting mode
Coordinate system rotation start or
G68.1 G68.1 G68.1 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode on
17
G68.2 G68.2 G68.2 Tilted working plane command
Tilted working plane specification in
G68.3 G68.3 G68.3
tool axis direction
Mirror image off for double turret or
G69 (*) G69 (*) G69 (*) 04
balance cutting mode cancel
Coordinate system rotation cancel or
G69.1 G69.1 G69.1 17 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode off
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 Pattern repeating cycle
G74 G74 G76 00 End face peck drilling cycle
Outer diameter/internal diameter
G75 G75 G77
drilling cycle
G76 G76 G78 Multiple-thread cutting cycle
G72.1 G72.1 G72.1 Figure copy (rotation copy)
G72.2 G72.2 G72.2 Figure copy (parallel copy)
Canned cycle cancel for drilling /
G80 (*) G80 (*) G80 (*) 10 Electronic gear box: synchronization
cancellation
Electronic gear box: synchronization
G80.4 G80.4 G80.4 28
cancellation
Electronic gear box 2 pair: synchronization
G80.5 G80.5 G80.5 27
cancellation
Spot drilling (FS15-T format) /
G81 G81 G81 10
Electronic gear box: synchronization start
G81.4 G81.4 G81.4 28 Electronic gear box: synchronization start
Electronic gear box 2 pair:
G81.5 G81.5 G81.5 27
synchronization start
G82 G82 G82 Counter boring (FS15-T format)
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
High-speed peck drilling cycle (FS15-T
G83.1 G83.1 G83.1
format)
G83.5 G83.5 G83.5 10 High-speed peck drilling cycle
G83.6 G83.6 G83.6 Peck drilling cycle
G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping
G84.2 G84.2 G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (FS15 format)
G85 G85 G85 Cycle for face boring
76
3 G CODE
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling
G87.5 G87.5 G87.5 High-speed peck drilling cycle
G87.6 G87.6 G87.6 10 Peck drilling cycle
G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring
Outer diameter/internal diameter
G90 G77 G20 01
cutting cycle
Maximum specified incremental
G91.1 G91.1 G91.1 00
amount check
G92 G78 G21 01 Thread cutting cycle
G93 G93 G93 05 Inverse time feed
G94 G79 G24 01 End face turning cycle
G96 G96 G96 02 Constant surface speed control
Spindle indexing (waiting for
G96.1 G96.1 G96.1
completion)
Spindle indexing (not waiting for
G96.2 G96.2 G96.2 00 completion)
G96.3 G96.3 G96.3 Spindle indexing completion check
G96.4 G96.4 G96.4 SV rotation control mode ON
G97 (*) G97 (*) G97 (*) 02 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 G94 G94 Feed per minute
05
G99 (*) G95 (*) G95 (*) Feed per revolution
- G90 (*) G90 (*) Absolute programming
03
- G91 G91 Incremental programming
- G98 G98 Canned cycle : return to initial level
11
- G99 G99 Canned cycle : return to R point level
77
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Positioning (G00)
Program format G00 IP_ ;
Illustration IP
Start point
Start point
G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 J_ K_
- For lathe system
G02 R_
X_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
Illustration (x, y)
G03
Start point
n
R G02
J R
J
I
I Start point
(x, y)
G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ α_F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ α_F_ ;
G03 J_ K_
Illustration z
Start
point (xyz)
(x, y)
79
B-63947EN/01
G02.2
G18 Zp_Xp_ K_ I_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2
G02.2
G19 Yp_ Zp_ J_ K_ R_ F_ ; 4
G03.2
Illustration Yp
End point
Start Pe
point I
Ps Po
J
0 R
Base circle
Xp
In case of X-Y plane
Function Exponential interpolation (G02.3, G03.3)
Program format Positive rotation
G02.3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ;
Negative rotation
G03.3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ;
Illustration A (Rotary axis)
∆A
X (Linear axis)
∆X
Relationship between X-axis and A-axis
Function Three-dimensional circular interpolation (G02.4, G03.4)
Program format G02.4 XX1 YY1 ZZ1 αα1 ββ1 ;
First block (mid-point of the arc)
XX2 YY2 ZZ2 αα2 ββ2 ;
Second block (end point of the arc)
α,β: Arbitrary axes other than the 3-dimensional circular
interpolation axis (up to two axes)
G03.4 can also be specified instead of G02.4.
Illustration Intermediate point
X (X1,Y1,Z1)
Y
Z
Start
point End point (X2,Y2,Z2)
80
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function AI contour control (G05.1)
Program format G05.1 Q1 ; AI contour control mode on
G05.1 Q0 ; AI contour control mode off
Function Nano smoothing (G05.1)
Program format G05.1 Q3 IP0 ; Nano smoothing mode on
G05.1 Q0 ; Nano smoothing mode off
Function Smooth interpolation (G05.1)
Program format G05.1 Q2 ; Smooth interpolation mode on
G05.1 Q0 ; Smooth interpolation mode off
Function NURBS interpolation (G06.2)
Program format G06.2[P_] K_ IP_ [R_] [F_]; NURBS interpolation mode on
P : Rank of NURBS curve
IP : Control point
R : Weight
K : Knot
F : Feedrate
Function Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07)
Program format G07 IP0 ; Hypothetical axis setting
G07 IP1 ; Hypothetical axis cancel
Function Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1)
Program format G07 IP_ r_; Cylindrical interpolation mode
r : Cylinder radius
G07 IP 0; Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel
Function AI contour control (Advanced preview control) (G08)
Program format G08 P1 ; AI contour control mode on
G08 P0 ; AI contour control mode off
Function Exact stop (G09)
Program format G01
G09 G02 IP_ ;
G03
Illustration Speed
Time
In-position check
81
B-63947EN/01
82
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Programmable parameter input (G10, G11)
Program format For parameter input mode
G10 L52 ; Parameter input mode setting
N_ R_ ; Non-axis parameter input
N_ P_ R_ ; Axis parameter input
:
G11 ; Parameter input mode cancel
N_ : Parameter No.
R_ : Parameter setting (leading zero omissible)
P_ : Axis number 1 to maximum number of controlled
axes (to be specified when an axis or spindle
parameter is input)
Withdrawal
Return
IP
Retract Repositioning
83
B-63947EN/01
Yp 4
Xp
Workpiece coordinate system
(IJK)
Start point
Intermediate point
IP
Start point
IP
Intermediate point
84
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Floating reference position return (G30.1)
Program format G30.1 IP_ ;
Illustration Floating reference position
Intermediate point
IP Start
point
G42
G40
85
B-63947EN/01
G40 : Cancel
Reference
tool
Programmed
Cutter path
compensation Cutter compensation
vector amount
86
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49)
Program format
G43
Z_ H_ ;
G44
G43
H_ ;
G44
B C
Z
Workpiece C
B
Y
X
87
B-63947EN/01
G 46 IP Decrease
G 47 Double increase
G 48 IP Double decrease
Offset amount
P, I, J, K: Scaling magnification
X, Y, Z: Control position of scaling
G50: Cancel
- For lathe system only
Enabled when G code system B/C is used
Illustration P4 P3
P 4’ P 3'
IP
P 1’ P 2’
P1 P2
IP
88
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Local coordinate system setting (G52)
Program format G52 IP_ ;
Illustration Local coordinate
system
x
IP Workpiece
y coordinate system
Illustration
IP
Workpiece
origin
offset
Workpiece coordinate system
Machine coordinate system
X
X
F0
F
θ θ0
X
Rotation axis
center
C
Z
W
W : Workpiece origin offset value
θ0 : Reference angle
Machine coordinate F0 : Reference fixture offset value
system origin θ : Rotation axis angle
F : Fixture offset value
x, y, z
X
x: Error in the X direction
y: Error in the Y direction
z: Error in the Z direction
a: Error in the rotation direction (about the X-axis)
b: Error in the rotation direction (about the Y-axis)
c: Error in the rotation direction (about the Z-axis)
89
B-63947EN/01
G64
t
G61
t
O_ ;
G65 P_L_ ;
M99 ;
90
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Coordinate system rotation, Three-dimensional coordinate
conversion (G68, G69), (G68.1, G69.1)
Program format - For machining center system
G17 X_ Y_
G68 G18 Z_ X_ Rα;
G19 Y_ Z_
G69 ; Cancel
- For lathe system
G17 X_ Y_
G68.1 G18 Z_ X_ Rα;
G19 Y_ Z_
G69.1 ; Cancel
Illustration In case of X-Y plane
Y
α
(x y)
X
Yc
Xc
91
B-63947EN/01
Linear copy
Y
P1
Start point P0 X
92
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Electric gear box (EGB) (G81, G80)
Program format G81 T_ (L_) (Q_ P_) ; Starts synchronization.
G80 ; Cancels synchronization.
T : Number of teeth (specifiable range: 1 to 1000)
L : Number of hob threads (specifiable range: -200 to
200)
Q : Module or diametral pitch
Specify a module in the case of metric input.
(Unit: 0.00001 mm, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 25.0
mm)
Specify a diametral pitch in the case of inch input.
(Unit: 0.00001 inch-1, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 25.0
inch-1)
P : Gear helix angle
(Unit: 0.0001 deg, Specifiable range: .90.0 to 90.0
deg.)
* When specifying Q and P, the user can use a decimal
point.
Function Electric gear box automatic phase synchronization (G81,
G80)
Program format - Acceleration/deceleration type
G81 T_ L_ R1 ; Synchronization start
G80 R1 ; Synchronization end
- Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase
synchronization type
G81 T_ L_ R2 ; Synchronization start
G80 R2 ; Synchronization end
93
B-63947EN/01
Spindle speed
N (min-1)
94
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function SV rotation control mode command (G96.1, G96.2, G96.3,
G96.4)
Program format G96.1 P_ ;
G96.2 P_ ;
G96.3 P_ ;
G96.4 P_ ;
Function Initial point return / R point return (G98, G99)
Program format - For machining center system only
G98_ ;
G99_ ;
Illustration G98
Initial level
G99
R level
Z point
95
5 CUSTOM MACRO
5.1 TYPES OF VARIABLES
Variable name Variable number Remarks
Local variable #1 - #33
Common variable #100 - #149 (#199) Variables #150 to #199 and #549
#500 - #549 (#999) to #999 are optional.
System variable greater than #1000 See Section 5.2 for details.
- Interface signals
System System
Attri-
variable variable Description
bute
number name
#1000 - [#_UI[n]] R Interface input signals (BIT), UI000-UI031
#1031 (Note)Subscript n represents a BIT position (0-31)
Corresponds to <Gn054 - Gn057>, respectively
#1032 - [#_UIL[n]] R Interface input signals (LONG), UI000 - UI031
#1035 / UI100 - UI131 / UI200 - UI231 / UI300 - UI331
(Note) Subscript n (0 - 3) 0=UI000 - UI031,
1=UI100 - UI131, 2=UI200 - UI231,
3=UI300 - UI331
Unified input of <Gn054 - Gn057>
#1100 - [#_UO[n]] R/W Interface output signals (BIT), UO000 - UO031
#1131 (Note)Subscript n represents a BIT position (0-31).
Corresponds to <Fn054 - Fn057>, respectively
#1132 - [#_UOL[n]] R/W Interface output signals (LONG),UO000 - UO031/
#1135 UO100 - UO131 / UO200 - UO231 /
UO300 - UO331
(Note) Subscript n (0 - 3): 0=UO000 - UO031,
1=UO100 - UO131, 2=UO200 - UO231,
3=UO300 - UO331
Unified output of <Fn054 - Fn057>
97
B-63947EN/01
98
5 CUSTOM MACRO
Tool compensation memory C when parameter V15 (No.6000#3) = 1
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#2001 - [#_OFSHG[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (H code, geometry)
#2200 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 200).
#10001 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#10999 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 999).
#2201 - [#_OFSHW[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (H code, wear)
#2400 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 200).
#11001 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#11999 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 999).
#2401 - [#_OFSDG[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (D code, geometry)
#2600 (Note 1)
Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 200).
(Note 1) Enabled when parameter D15
(No.6004#5) = 1.
#12001 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#12999 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 999).
#2601 - [#_OFSDW[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (D code, wear)
#2800 (Note 1)
Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 200).
(Note 1) Enabled when parameter D15
(No.6004#5) = 1.
#13001 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#13999 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 999).
99
B-63947EN/01
100
5 CUSTOM MACRO
With tool geometry/wear compensation memory
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#2451 - [#_OFSYG[n]] R/W Y-axis compensation value (geometry) (*1)
#2499 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 49).
#19001 - When the number of sets is larger than 49,
#19999 the numbers to the left can be used.
(Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 999).
#2701 - [#_OFSXG[n]] R/W X-axis compensation value (geometry) (*1)
#2749 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 49).
#15001 - When the number of sets is larger than 49,
#15999 the numbers to the left can be used.
(Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 49).
#2801 - [#_OFSZG[n]] R/W Z-axis compensation value (geometry) (*1)
#2849 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 49).
#16001 - When the number of sets is larger than 49,
#16999 the numbers to the left can be used.
(Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 999).
#2901 - [#_OFSRG[n]] R/W Tool nose radius compensation value
#2964 (geometry)
(Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
#17001 - number (1 - 64).
#17999 When the number of sets is larger than 64,
the numbers to the left can be used.
(Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 999).
(*1) X-axis: X-axis of basic three axes, Z-axis: Z-axis of basic three axes,
Y-axis: Y-axis of basic three axes
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#2501 [#_WKSFTX] R/W X-axis workpiece shift amount (*1)
#2601 [#_WKSFTZ] R/W Z-axis workpiece shift amount (*1)
(*1) X-axis: X-axis of basic three axes, Z-axis: Z-axis of basic three axes
101
B-63947EN/01
System System
Attri-
variable variable Description
bute
number name
#3004 [#_CNTL2] R/W Enable or disable feed hold.
Enable or disable feedrate override.
Enable or disable exact stop check.
#3004 bit0 [#_M_FHD] R/W Enable or disable feed hold.
#3004 bit1 [#_M_OV] R/W Enable or disable feedrate override.
#3004 bit2 [#_M_EST] R/W Enable or disable exact stop check.
#3005 [#_SETDT] R/W Read/write setting data.
#3006 [#_MSGSTP] W Stop with a message.
5
#3007 [#_MRIMG] R Status of a mirror image (DI and setting)
#3008 [#_PRSTR] R Restarting/not restarting a program
- Time
System
System variable Attri-
variable Description
name bute
number
#3011 [#_DATE] R Year/Month/Date
#3012 [#_TIME] R Hour/Minute/Second
- Number of parts
System
System variable Attri-
variable Description
name bute
number
#3901 [#_PRTSA] R/W Total number of parts
#3902 [#_PRTSN] R/W Number of required parts
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#3980 [#_OFSMEM] R Tool compensation memory information
- Modal information
M
System System
Attri-
variable variable Description
bute
number name
#4001 - [#_BUFG[n]] R Modal information on blocks that have been
#4030 specified by last minute (G code)
(Note) Subscript n represents a G code group
number.
#4102 [#_BUFB] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (B code)
#4107 [#_BUFD] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (D code)
#4108 [#_BUFE] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (E code)
#4109 [#_BUFF] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (F code)
102
5 CUSTOM MACRO
System System
Attri-
variable variable Description
bute
number name
#4111 [#_BUFH] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (H code)
#4113 [#_BUFM] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (M code)
#4114 [#_BUFN] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (sequence number)
#4115 [#_BUFO] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (program number)
#4119 [#_BUFS] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (S code)
#4120 [#_BUFT] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (T code)
#4130 [#_BUFWZP] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (additional workpiece
coordinate system number)
#4201 - [#_ACTG[n]] R Modal information on the block currently being
#4230 executed (G code)
(Note) Subscript n represents a G code group
number.
#4302 [#_ACTB] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (B code)
#4307 [#_ACTD] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (D code)
#4308 [#_ACTE] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (E code)
#4309 [#_ACTF] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (F code)
#4311 [#_ACTH] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (H code)
#4313 [#_ACTM] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (M code)
#4314 [#_ACTN] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (sequence number)
#4315 [#_ACTO] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (program number)
#4319 [#_ACTS] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (S code)
#4320 [#_ACTT] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (T code)
#4330 [#_ACTWZP] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (additional workpiece coordinate
system number)
#4502 [#_INTB] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (B code)
#4507 [#_INTD] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (D code)
#4508 [#_INTE] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (E code)
#4509 [#_INTF] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (F code)
#4511 [#_INTH] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (H code)
#4513 [#_INTM] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (M code)
#4514 [#_INTN] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(sequence number)
#4515 [#_INTO] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(program number)
#4519 [#_INTS] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (S code)
#4520 [#_INTT] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (T code)
#4530 [#_INTWZP] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(additional workpiece coordinate system
number)
103
B-63947EN/01
System System
Attri-
variable variable Description
bute
number name
#4001 - [#_BUFG[n]] R Modal information on blocks that have been
#4030 specified by last minute (G code)
(Note) Subscript n represents a G code group
number.
#4108 [#_BUFE] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (E code)
#4109 [#_BUFF] R Modal information on blocks that have been 5
specified by last minute (F code)
#4113 [#_BUFM] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (M code)
#4114 [#_BUFN] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (sequence number)
#4115 [#_BUFO] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (program number)
#4119 [#_BUFS] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (S code)
#4120 [#_BUFT] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (T code)
#4130 [#_BUFWZP] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (additional workpiece
coordinate system number)
#4201 - [#_ACTG[n]] R Modal information on the block currently being
#4230 executed (G code)
(Note) Subscript n represents a G code group
number.
#4308 [#_ACTE] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (E code)
#4309 [#_ACTF] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (F code)
#4313 [#_ACTM] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (M code)
#4314 [#_ACTN] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (sequence number)
#4315 [#_ACTO] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (program number)
#4319 [#_ACTS] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (S code)
#4320 [#_ACTT] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (T code)
#4330 [#_ACTWZP] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (additional workpiece coordinate
system number)
#4401 - [#_INTG[n]] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (G code)
#4430 (Note) Subscript n represents a G code group
number.
#4508 [#_INTE] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (E code)
#4509 [#_INTF] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (F code)
#4513 [#_INTM] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (M code)
#4514 [#_INTN] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(sequence number)
#4515 [#_INTO] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(program number)
#4519 [#_INTS] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (S code)
#4520 [#_INTT] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (T code)
104
5 CUSTOM MACRO
System System
Attri-
variable variable Description
bute
number name
#4530 [#_INTWZP] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(additional workpiece coordinate system
number)
- Position information
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#5001 - [#_ABSIO[n]] R End point position of the previous block
#5020 (workpiece coordinate system)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#100001 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#100050 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5021 - [#_ABSMT[n]] R Specified current position (machine
#5040 coordinate system)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#100051 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#100100 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5041 - [#_ABSOT[n]] R Specified current position (workpiece
#5060 coordinate system)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#100101 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#100150 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5061 - [#_ABSKP[n]] R Skip position (workpiece coordinate system)
#5080 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#100151 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#100200 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#5081 - [#_TOFS[n]] R Tool length compensation value
#5100 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#100201 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#100250 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
105
B-63947EN/01
- Distance to go
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#5181 - [#_DIST[n]] R Distance to go
#5200 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#100801 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#100850 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
106
5 CUSTOM MACRO
- Workpiece origin offset value, extended workpiece origin offset
value
M
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#5201 - [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W Common workpiece origin offset value
#5220 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5221 - [#_WZG54[n]] R/W G54 workpiece origin offset value
#5240 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5241 - [#_WZG55[n]] R/W G55 workpiece origin offset value
#5260 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5261 - [#_WZG56[n]] R/W G56 workpiece origin offset value
#5280 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5281 - [#_WZG57[n]] R/W G57 workpiece origin offset value
#5300 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5301 - [#_WZG58[n]] R/W G58 workpiece origin offset value
#5320 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5321 - [#_WZG59[n]] R/W G59 workpiece origin offset value
#5340 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#100301 - [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W Common workpiece origin offset value
#100350 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100351 - [#_WZG54[n]] R/W G54 workpiece origin offset value
#100400 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100401 - [#_WZG55[n]] R/W G55 workpiece origin offset value
#100450 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100451 - [#_WZG56[n]] R/W G56 workpiece origin offset value
#100500 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100501 - [#_WZG57[n]] R/W G57 workpiece origin offset value
#100550 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100551 - [#_WZG58[n]] R/W G58 workpiece origin offset value
#100600 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100601 - [#_WZG59[n]] R/W G59 workpiece origin offset value
#100650 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
Extended workpiece origin offset value
#7001 - [#_WZP1[n]] R/W G54.1P1 workpiece origin offset value
#7020 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#7021 - [#_WZP2[n]] R/W G54.1P2 workpiece origin offset value
#7040 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
: : : :
#7941 - [#_WZP48[n]] R/W G54.1P48 workpiece origin offset value
#7960 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#14001 - [#_WZP1[n]] R/W G54.1P1 workpiece origin offset value
#14020 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
107
B-63947EN/01
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#14051 - [#_WZP2[n]] R/W G54.1P2 workpiece origin offset value
#14100 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
: : : :
#19971 - [#_WZP300[n]] R/W G54.1P300 workpiece origin offset value
#20000 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#101001 - [#_WZP1[n]] R/W G54.1P1 workpiece origin offset value
#101050 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis 5
number (1 - 50).
#101051 - [#_WZP2[n]] R/W G54.1P2 workpiece origin offset value
#101100 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
: : : :
#115901 - [#_WZP299[n]] R/W G54.1P299 workpiece origin offset value
#115950 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#115951 - [#_WZP300[n]] R/W G54.1P300 workpiece origin offset value
#116000 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#5201 - [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W External workpiece origin offset value
#5220 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5221 - [#_WZG54[n]] R/W G54 workpiece origin offset value
#5240 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5241 - [#_WZG55[n]] R/W G55 workpiece origin offset value
#5260 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5261 - [#_WZG56[n]] R/W G56 workpiece origin offset value
#5280 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5281 - [#_WZG57[n]] R/W G57 workpiece origin offset value
#5300 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5301 - [#_WZG58[n]] R/W G58 workpiece origin offset value
#5320 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#5321 - [#_WZG59[n]] R/W G59 workpiece origin offset value
#5340 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#100301 - [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W External workpiece origin offset value
#100350 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100351 - [#_WZG54[n]] R/W G54 workpiece origin offset value
#100400 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100401 - [#_WZG55[n]] R/W G55 workpiece origin offset value
#100450 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100451 - [#_WZG56[n]] R/W G56 workpiece origin offset value
#100500 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
108
5 CUSTOM MACRO
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#100501 - [#_WZG57[n]] R/W G57 workpiece origin offset value
#100550 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100551 - [#_WZG58[n]] R/W G58 workpiece origin offset value
#100600 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#100601 - [#_WZG59[n]] R/W G59 workpiece origin offset value
#100650 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
Extended workpiece origin offset value
#7001 - [#_WZP1[n]] R/W G54.1P1 workpiece origin offset value
#7020 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#7021 - [#_WZP2[n]] R/W G54.1P2 workpiece origin offset value
#7040 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
: : : :
#7941 - [#_WZP48[n]] R/W G54.1P48 workpiece origin offset value
#7960 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#101001 - [#_WZP1[n]] R/W G54.1P1 workpiece origin offset value
#101050 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#101051 - [#_WZP2[n]] R/W G54.1P2 workpiece origin offset value
#101100 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
: : : :
#115901 - [#_WZP299[n]] R/W G54.1P299 workpiece origin offset value
#115950 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#115951 - [#_WZP300[n]] R/W G54.1P300 workpiece origin offset value
#116000 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
System
System variable Attri-
variable Description
name bute
number
#5500 [#_FOFSP] R Number of the standard fixture offset
being selected (P)
109
B-63947EN/01
System
System variable Attri-
variable Description
name bute
number
#5501 - [#_FOFSVAL[n]] R Offset value of the standard fixture offset
#5520 being selected
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#117001 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#117050 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5521 - [#_FOFS1[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (first set)
#5540 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis 5
number (1 - 20).
#117051 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#117100 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5541 - [#_FOFS2[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (second set)
#5560 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#117101 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#117150 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5561 - [#_FOFS3[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (third set)
#5580 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#117151 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#117200 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5581 - [#_FOFS4[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (fourth set)
#5600 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#117201 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#117250 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5601 - [#_FOFS5[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (fifth set)
#5620 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#117251 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#117300 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5621 - [#_FOFS6[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (sixth set)
#5640 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#117301 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#117350 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5641 - [#_FOFS7[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (seventh
#5660 set)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#117351 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#117400 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5661 - [#_FOFS8[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (eighth set)
#5680 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#117401 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
#117450 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
110
5 CUSTOM MACRO
- Dynamic standard tool compensation value
M
System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#118051 - [#_DOFS1[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value
#118100 (first set)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#118101 - [#_DOFS2[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value
#118150 (second set)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#118151 - [#_DOFS3[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value
#118200 (third set)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#118201 - [#_DOFS4[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value
#118250 (fourth set)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#118251 - [#_DOFS5[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value
#118300 (fifth set)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#118301 - [#_DOFS6[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value
#118350 (sixth set)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#118351 - [#_DOFS7[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value
#118400 (seventh set)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#118401 - [#_DOFS8[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value
#118450 (eighth set)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
- Others
System System
Attri-
variable variable Description
bute
number name
#8570 R/W Switching between P-CODE/system variables
(#10000 and above)
#8570=0 : System variable
#8570=1 : P code variable
- System variable
System constant System
Attribute Description
number constant name
#0 , #3100 [#_EMPTY] R Null
#3101 [#_PI] R Circular constant
π = 3.14159265358979323846
#3102 [#_E] R Base of natural logarithm
e = 2.71828182845904523536
111
B-63947EN/01
112
5 CUSTOM MACRO
Type of
Operation Description
operation
<4> #i=SIN[#j] Sine (in degrees)
Functions #i=COS[#j] Cosine (in degrees)
#i=TAN[#j] Tangent (in degrees)
#i=ASIN[#j] Arc sine
#i=ACOS[#j] Arc cosine
#i=ATAN[#j] Arc tangent (one argument), ATN can also
be used.
#i=ATAN[#j]/[#k] Arc tangent (two arguments), ATN can also
be used.
#i=ATAN[#j,#k] Arc tangent (two arguments), ATN can also
be used.
#i=SQRT[#j] Square root, SQR can also be used.
#i=ABS[#j] Absolute value
#i=BIN[#j] Conversion from BCD to binary
#i=BCD[#j] Conversion from binary to BCD
#i=ROUND[#j] Rounding off, RND can also be used.
#i=FIX[#j] Rounding down to an integer
#i=FUP[#j] Rounding up to an integer
#i=LN[#j] Natural logarithm
#i=EXP[#j] Exponent using base e (2.718...)
#i=POW[#j,#k] Power (#j to the #kth power)
#i=ADP[#j] Addition of a decimal point
113
B-63947EN/01
Call nesting
The macro call nesting level is five, including simple calls (G65) and
modal calls (G66/G66.1). The subprogram call nesting level is 15,
including macro calls.
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: #3=#1+#2 ;
G65 P9010 L2 A1.0 B2.0 ; IF [#3 GT 360] GOTO 9 ;
: G00 G91 X#3 ;
M30 ; N9 M99 ;
O0001 ; O9100 ;
: :
G66 P9100 L2 A1.0 B2.0 ; G00 Z-#1 ;
G00 G90 X100.0 ; G01 Z-#2 F300 ;
Y200.0 ; :
X150.0 Y300.0 ; :
G67 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
114
5 CUSTOM MACRO
5.6.3 Modal Call: Each Block Call (G66.1)
Specified macro is unconditionally called for each NC command block.
All data other than O, file name, N, and G codes that is specified in each
block is not executed and is used as arguments.
P : Number of the program to call
G66.1 P p L l <argument-specification> ;
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
Argument : Data passed to the macro
O0001 ; O9100 ;
: :
G66.1 P9100 L2 A1.0 G00 Z-#1 ;
B2.0 ; G01 Z-#2 F#9 ;
A10.0 B20.0 F300 ; :
A0 B-30.0 ; :
F1000 ; :
G67 ; :
: M99 ;
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: :
G81 X10.0 Y20.0 Z-10.0 ; :
: :
M30 ; N9 M99 ;
Parameter No.6050=81
115
B-63947EN/01
O0001 ; O9020 ;
: :
M50 A1.0 B2.0 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Parameter No.6080=50
5
- Correspondence between parameter numbers and program
numbers
Parameter number Corresponding program number
6080 O9020
6081 O9021
6082 O9022
6083 O9023
6084 O9024
6085 O9025
6086 O9026
6087 O9027
6088 O9028
6089 O9029
116
5 CUSTOM MACRO
5.6.7 Subprogram Calls Using a T Code
By enabling subprograms to be called with a T code in a parameter, a
subprogram can be called each time the T code is specified in the
machining program.
O0001 ; O9000 ;
: :
T23 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Parameter No.6001#5=1
O0001 ; O9029 ;
: :
S23 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Parameter No.6007#1=1
O0001 ; O9028 ;
: :
B23 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Parameter No.6007#2=1
117
B-63947EN/01
Parameter No.6090=66(B)
5
By setting the code (ASCII code converted to decimal) corresponding to
a specific address in parameter (No. 6090 or No. 6091), the custom
macro program, O9004 or O9005, corresponding to each parameter can
be called when the specific address is specified in a machining program.
The code value corresponding to a specific address specified in a
machining program is assigned to the common variables (#146, #147).
The table below indicates the addresses that can be set.
NOTE
When address L is set, the number of repetitions cannot be set.
118
5 CUSTOM MACRO
Address Parameter setting
Q 81
R 82
S 83
T 84
NOTE
When address L is set, the number of repetitions cannot be set.
Format
M96Pxxxx ; Enables custom macro interrupt
M97 ; Disables custom macro interrupt
M96 Pxxxxxxxx;
Interrupt signal
(UINT) * O xxxxxxxx;
Interrupt signal
(UINT) **
M99 (Pxxxxxxxx) ;
Nxxxxxxxx ;
119
B-63947EN/01
120
5 CUSTOM MACRO
121
6 HARDWARE
6.1 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i/31i/32i
HARDWARE
This section describes the printed circuit boards in the LCD-mounted
type Series 30i/31i/32i control units and the functions of the card PCBs
on the printed circuit boards.
6.1.1 Hardware Structure.................................................................. 123
6.1.2 Overview of Hardware ............................................................. 124
6.1.3 Total Connection Diagrams ..................................................... 125
6.1.4 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board Connectors and Cards . 128
6.1.5 List of Units and Printed Circuit Boards ................................... 147
6.1.6 I/O ........................................................................................... 150
Servo amplifier
I/O Link
123
B-63947EN/01
Main board
• CPU for controlling CNC
• Power supply
• 2-axis to 24-axis control
• Spindle interface
• LCD/MDI interface
• I/O Link
• PMC control function
• High-speed DI
• RS-232C
Fast Ethernet board • Memory card interface
Data server function • PC function
Ethernet communication function (for 300is/310is/320is)
6
Additional axis board
Basic system
Additional axis control function
I/O Link
On a unit with optional slots, as many optional boards as the slots can be
mounted.
124
6 HARDWARE
6.1.3 Total Connection Diagrams
Main board
LCD unit 24V-IN(CPD16A) 24 VDC power supply
MDI UNIT
MDI(CA55) CK27
R232-2(JD36A
/JD54) { RS-232-C I/O device
Touch panel
HDI(JA40)
High-peed skip input
SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
3rd and 4th
spindles PSM
Position coder
SPM
FSSB(COP10A-1) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
FSSB(COP10A-2) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
ETHERNET(CD38A Ethernet
/CD38S)
125
B-63947EN/01
Optional slot
SPDL(JA41L)
7th spindle
SPM
FSSB(COP10A-3) COP10B
Servo motor
6
SVM
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
126
6 HARDWARE
ETHERNET(CD38R) Ethernet
HSSB board
PROFIBUS
master board
PROFI(CN1) Another NC
or another PROFIBUS unit
PROFIBUS slave
board
PROFI(CN2) Another NC
or another PROFIBUS unit
DeviceNet master
board
DVNET(TBL) Another NC
or another DeviceNet unit
DeviceNet slave
board
DVNET(TBL) Another NC
or another DeviceNet unit
FL-net board
127
B-63947EN/01
Battery
Rear of unit
COP10A-1 COP10A-2
(COP10A is a connector installed on the servo card.)
CK21A CDP16A
JD36A JD51A
CA79A
JGM CA87A
CA88A
Main board
CK21A CPD16A
JD36A JD51A
128
6 HARDWARE
Connector No. Application
COP10A-1, COP10A-2 Servo amplifier (FSSB)
CA55 MDI
JD56A RS-232C serial port 1 / Serial spindle
JD36A RS-232C serial port 2
JA40 High-speed DI
JD51A I/O Link
JA41 Serial spindle
CPD16A 24VDC-IN
JGM Back panel interface
CA79A Video signal interface
CA88A PCMCIA interface
CK20A Soft key (horizontal type)
CK21A Soft key (vertical type)
CA87A Inverter
CD38A Ethernet
129
B-63947EN/01
Connector
Connector
6
Connector
(3) Power
supply unit
130
6 HARDWARE
DIMM module mounting location
Connector Connector
DIMM module
socket
131
B-63947EN/01
Block diagram
Main board
CPU card
I/O Link
4ch
To back panel
Display
unit
132
6 HARDWARE
LED display
Rear of unit
ALM2
ALM3
LOW
COM
LINK
(green) (yellow)
133
B-63947EN/01
Main board
6
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with self-tapping screws.
134
6 HARDWARE
Locations of the inverter and connector unit
Inverter Connector unit
Battery
Rear of unit
135
B-63947EN/01
Battery
Rear of unit
CA55 (FUSE) 6
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power
supply unit
COP
CD38S
JD54 JD51A
CPD16A
CA88A
Main board
TP2 or
CA95 CA55
(FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power
CPD12
supply unit
CK20A CD38S
CK21A JD54 JD51A
CPD16A
136
6 HARDWARE
Card and power supply unit mounting location
(1) Main board B1, B2 for 15” display unit
コネクタ
Connector
(4) Power supply unit
137
B-63947EN/01
Connector
6
Compact Flash card
Display control card
socket
Connector side
コネクタ
Connector
(4) Power supply unit
138
6 HARDWARE
No. Name Specification Function Remarks
(2) CPU card A20B-3300-0477 Standard version,
DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0474 Standard version,
DRAM 64MB
A20B-3300-0475 Standard version,
DRAM 128MB
A20B-3300-0470 High-speed version,
DRAM 64MB
A20B-3300-0471 High-speed version,
DRAM 128MB
A20B-3300-0491 Dedicated to the 32i,
DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0490 Dedicated to the 32i,
DRAM 64MB
A20B-3300-0492 Dedicated to the 32i,
DRAM 128MB
(3) Display control A20B-3300-0551 For 15” color LCD
card
(4) Power supply A20B-8101-0010
unit
コネクタ
Connector
139
B-63947EN/01
コネクタ
Connector
140
6 HARDWARE
Block diagram
(1) Main board B1, B2
Main board
GUI card CPU card
DRAM Display
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT Compact control
software Flash card
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
control 2 To back panel
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display
unit
Main board
GUI card CPU card
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
control 2 To back panel
Compact
Flash card
Peripheral PMC module
control 1
I/O Link
Axis control card
1,2ch control
Ethernet
control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display unit
RS232C
141
B-63947EN/01
LED display
(1) Main board B1, B2
Rear view
Rear of unit
DNV4
(2) GUI status (green)
DNV3
(4) GUI POWER (green)
DNV2
DNV1
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
142
6 HARDWARE
(2) Main board F1, F2
Rear view
Rear of unit
DNV4
(2) GUI status (green)
DNV3
(4) GUI POWER (green)
DNV2
DNV1
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
(1) Alarm LED (CNC alarm red LED) indication at CNC system
alarm occurrence
If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is
defective.
Alarm LED
No. Meaning
3 2 1
1 Low battery voltage.
The battery may be is running out.
2 Software detected an error and stopped the system.
3 Hardware detected a failure in the system.
4 An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main
board. The servo card or servo amplifier may be faulty, or
the FSSB may be broken.
5 An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the
DIMM module.
The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage may
have dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
6
Abnormal power supply operation.
The cause may be noise or a power supply module failure.
: On, : Off
Alarm LED Meaning
LOW The CPU card may be faulty.
143
B-63947EN/01
144
6 HARDWARE
Jumper plug setting
(1) Main board B1, B2
Main board
Power
supply unit
Main board
Power
supply unit
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with self-tapping screws.
145
B-63947EN/01
CA87A
CPD12
For 15.0”LCD
Fan adapter 6
CN1
15.0”LCD Inverter
unit CN02 CN01
CN03
CN04
CN05
Inverter connection cable
Conversion cable
Rear view
Rear of unit
Power
COP supply unit
Two types of connectors are provided on the inverter. Plug into a matching connector.
Each of the two cables from the LCD backlight section may be connected to either of
the two cables from the inverter.
146
6 HARDWARE
6.1.5 List of Units and Printed Circuit Boards
6.1.5.1 Basic unit
CNC
Name Drawing number
model
30i-A Basic unit (No slot) A02B-0303-B500
Basic unit (1 slot) A02B-0303-B501
Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-B502
31i-A5 Basic unit (No slot) A02B-0306-B500
Basic unit (1 slot) A02B-0306-B501
Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0306-B502
31i-A Basic unit (No slot) A02B-0307-B500
Basic unit (1 slot) A02B-0307-B501
Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0307-B502
32i-A Basic unit (No slot) A02B-0308-B500
Basic unit (1 slot) A02B-0308-B501
Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0308-B502
CNC
Name Drawing number
model
All Case unit (No slot) A02B-0303-C500
models Case unit (1 slot) A02B-0303-C501
Case unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-C502
A case unit includes a case, back panel, fan, and battery.
147
B-63947EN/01
CNC
Name Drawing number ID
model
All M series / English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C121#M 02
models For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
T series / English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C125#T 40
Horizontal type, ONG
M series / English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C125#M 02
Horizontal type, ONG
T series / English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C126#T 40
Vertical type, ONG
M series / English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C126#M 02
Vertical type, ONG
English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C128 20 6
QWERTY
148
6 HARDWARE
Name Drawing number ID
Axis control card B12 (FSSB 1-path) A20B-3300-0448 0010B
Axis control card B13 (FSSB 1-path) A20B-3300-0447 0010A
Axis control card B24 (FSSB 2-path) A20B-3300-0442 00103
Axis control card B26 (FSSB 2-path) A20B-3300-0440 00101
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0160 FROM: C1
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 1MB) SRAM: 03
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0161 FROM: C1
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 2MB) SRAM: 04
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0163 FROM: C2
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 1MB) SRAM: 03
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0164 FROM: C2
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 2MB) SRAM: 04
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0166 FROM: C3
(FROM 64MB, SRAM 1MB) SRAM: 03
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0167 FROM: C3
(FROM 64MB, SRAM 2MB) SRAM: 04
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0180 FROM: C1
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 256kB) SRAM: 01
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0181 FROM: C1
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 512kB) SRAM: 02
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0182 FROM: C2
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 256kB) SRAM: 01
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0183 FROM: C2
(FROM 32MB, SRAM 512kB) SRAM: 02
PMC module A20B-3900-0200 00700
Display control For main board B1, B2 A20B-3300-0420 0000x1
card For main board F1, F2 A20B-3300-0551 0101XX
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070 00121
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320 0030C
HSSB board A20B-8101-0111 00611
Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0030 00701
FL-net board A20B-8101-0031 00702
PROFIBUS master board A20B-8101-0050 00704
PROFIBUS slave board A20B-8101-0100 00705
DeviceNet master board A20B-8101-0220 00706
DeviceNet slave board A20B-8101-0330 00708
Back panel (No slot) A20B-2003-0600 01
Back panel (1 slot) A20B-2003-0810 00
Back panel (2 slots) A20B-2003-0610 10
Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010 –
Inverter (for 7.2” color LCD) A20B-8100-0961 –
Inverter (for 8.4” color LCD) A20B-8100-0963 –
Inverter (for 10.4” color LCD) A20B-8100-0962 –
Inverter (for 15” color LCD) A14L-0143-0002 –
Touch panel control board A20B-8002-0310 –
(*) Refer to Subsection 6.4.1, “Optional Board” for details of Optional
board.
149
B-63947EN/01
6.1.6 I/O
Name Drawing number Remarks
Distributed I/O connector panel A20B-2002-0470 DI/DO: 72/56
I/O module A1 DI=general 16,
matrix 56, with MPG
interface
Distributed I/O connector panel A20B-2002-0520 DI/DO: 48/32, with
I/O module B1 MPG interface
Distributed I/O connector panel A20B-2002-0521 DI/DO: 48/32
I/O module B2
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C001 DI/DO: 24/16
I/O basic module
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C002 DI/DO: 24/16, with 6
I/O expansion module A MPG interface
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C003 DI/DO: 24/16
I/O expansion module B
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C004 DO: 16 (2A output)
I/O expansion module C
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C005 Analog input
I/O expansion module D
Distributed I/O type 2 basic A03B-0815-C040 DI/DO:48/32, with
module B1 MPG interface
Distributed I/O type 2 basic A03B-0815-C041 DI/DO:48/32, without
module B2 MPG interface
Distributed I/O type 2 expansion A03B-0815-C042 DI/DO:48/32
module E1
Terminal block type I/O module A03B-0823-C001 DI/DO:24/16, with I/O
Basic module Link interface
Terminal block type I/O module A03B-0823-C002 DI/DO:24/16, with
Expansion module A MPG interface
Terminal block type I/O module A03B-0823-C003 DI/DO:24/16, without
Expansion module B MPG interface
Main panel machine operator’s A02B-0303-C231
panel
Sub panel A machine operator’s A02B-0236-C232
panel
Sub panel D machine operator’s A02B-0236-C244
panel
Operator’s panel connector unit A16B-2202-0731 DI/DO: 64/32
(Source type output A)
Operator’s panel connector unit A16B-2202-0730 DI/DO: 96/64
(Source type output B)
Handy machine operator’s panel A02B-0259-C221#A
Interface unit for handy machine A02B-0259-C220
operator's panel
FANUC I/O Link-AS-i converter A03B-0817-C001
(for AS-I Ver.2.0)
FANUC I/O Link-AS-i converter A03B-0817-C002
(for AS-I Ver.2.1)
I/O Link distributed adapter (2ch) A20B-1007-0680
I/O Link distributed adapter (3ch) A20B-1008-0360
150
6 HARDWARE
6.1.6.1 Others
Name Drawing number Remarks
Separate detector interface unit A02B-0303-C205
(basic 4 axes)
Separate detector interface unit A02B-0236-C204
(additional 4 axes)
Analog input separate detector A06B-6061-C201
interface unit (basic 4 axes)
Optical I/O Link adapter A13B-0154-B001
Optical adapter A13B-0154-B003 For serial spindle
I/O Link connection unit A A20B-2000-0410
I/O Link connection unit B A20B-2000-0411
I/O Link connection unit C A20B-2000-0412
Spindle distributed adapter A13B-0180-B001
PC-side HSSB interface board A20B-8101-0162
(2CH.) Compatible with the PCI bus
PC-side HSSB interface board A20B-8101-0163
(1CH.) Compatible with the PCI bus
Case for basic unit (No slot) A02B-0303-D100#0A
Case for basic unit (1 slot) A02B-0303-D100#1A
Case for basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-D100#2A
Fan for basic unit (No slot) A02B-0303-K120 40-mm square, 2 pcs
151
B-63947EN/01
300is/310is/320is
control unit
24V-IN(CPD16A)
SPDL (JA41)
I/O LINK(JD51A)
The functions and connections of the connectors on the left
HDI(JA40)
are the same as for the Series 30i/31i/32i. See Subsection
MDI(CA55) 6.1.3, “Total Connection Diagrams.”
FSSB(COP10A-1)
FSSB(COP10A-2)
Ethernet(CD38S) HUB
Ethernet backbone cable
152
6 HARDWARE
6.2.4 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board
Connectors and Cards
6.2.4.1 Main board
Name Specification
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C1 (10.4”) A20B-8101-0020
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C3 (12.1”) A20B-8101-0023
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C2 (15”) A20B-8101-0021
310is-A, 320is-A main board C4 (10.4”) A20B-8101-0024
310is-A, 320is-A main board C6 (12.1”) A20B-8101-0027
310is-A, 320is-A main board C5 (15”) A20B-8101-0025
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G1 (10.4”) A20B-8101-0370
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G3 (12.1”) A20B-8101-0373
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G2 (15”) A20B-8101-0371
310is-A, 320is-A main board G4 (10.4”) A20B-8101-0374
310is-A, 320is-A main board G6 (12.1”) A20B-8101-0377
310is-A, 320is-A main board G5 (15”) A20B-8101-0375
Battery
Rear view
Rear of unit
CA76
CA55 (FUSE)
JA40 JA41
Power
COP supply unit
CD38S
JD56A JD54 JD51A CA75
or
CA113 CPD16A
CA98
JGM CA87A CN79A
CA88A
Main board
CK20A CD38S
JD56A JD54 JD51A CA75
CK21A
or
CA113 CPD16A
153
B-63947EN/01
154
6 HARDWARE
Card and power supply unit mounting location
コネクタ
Connect
or
(4) Power supply unit
155
B-63947EN/01
コネクタ
Connector
GUI card
(3) Compact Flash card
Connector
156
6 HARDWARE
Main board G1 to G6
DIMM
(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM module
module socket (3) Compact Flash card
コネクタ
Connector
157
B-63947EN/01
Block diagram
- Main board C1 to C6
Main board
GUI card CPU card
DRAM Display
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT Compact control
software Flash card
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
control 2 To back panel
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
6
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display
unit
- Main board G1 to G6
Main board
GUI card CPU card
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
control 2 To back panel
Compact
Flash card
Peripheral PMC module
control 1
I/O Link
Axis control card
1,2ch control
USB
Ethernet control
control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display unit
RS232C
158
6 HARDWARE
LED display
- Main board C1 to C6
Rear view
Rear of unit
DNV4
(2) GUI status (green)
DNV3
(2) GUI POWER (green)
DNV2
DNV1
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
159
B-63947EN/01
- Main board G1 to G6
Rear view
Rear of unit
DNV4
(2) GUI status (green)
DNV3
(4) GUI POWER (green)
DNV2
DNV1
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
(1) Alarm LED (CNC alarm red LED) indication at CNC system alarm
occurrence
If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is defective.
CNC alarm
No. LED Status
3 2 1
1 Low battery voltage.
The battery may be is running out.
2 Software detected an error and stopped the system.
3 Hardware detected a failure in the system.
4 An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main
board. The servo card or servo amplifier may be faulty, or
the FSSB may be broken.
5 An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the
DIMM module.
The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage may
have dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
6
Abnormal power supply operation.
The cause may be noise or a power supply module failure.
: On, : Off
Alarm LED Meaning
LOW The CPU card may be faulty.
160
6 HARDWARE
(2) Changes in status LED (GUI side status: Green LED) indication at
power-on time
Status LED
No. (DNV1 to 3) Status
3. 2. 1
State where the power is not tuned on, or state where the
1 system was started up successfully and is running
normally
2 State immediately after the power is turned on
The interface between the CPU card and GUI card is being
initialized.
3 If the status does not proceed further beyond this
indication, the CPU card, GUI card, or main board may be
faulty.
Start-up on the GUI card side is being awaited.
4 If the status does not proceed further beyond this
indication, the GUI card or main board may be faulty.
The CPU card screen is being output to the GUI card, or a
RAM error occurred in the interface between the CPU card
5 and GUI card. If the status does not proceed further
beyond this indication, the CPU card, GUI card, or main
board may be faulty.
: On, : Off
(4) GUI POWER (green LED) indicates that power is supplied to the
GUI card (at the time of back-up operation as well).
(5) See Section 19.4, “LED Display” for details of 7-segment LED.
Main board
Power
supply unit
161
B-63947EN/01
- Main board G1 to G6
Main board
Power
6
supply unit
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with self-tapping screws.
162
6 HARDWARE
Details of the inverter
300is/310is/320is
main board
CPD12
For 12.1" LCD
Fan adapter
CN1
Conversion cable
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
163
B-63947EN/01
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
164
6 HARDWARE
165
B-63947EN/01
166
6 HARDWARE
Drawing
Name Parent type Remarks
number
LCD For 10.4” Without touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303- ID=1111
unit main LCD panel H121 D563
board With touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
G1 to panel H129 D541
G6
12.1” Without touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303- ID=1110
LCD panel H173 D557
With touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
panel H175 D545
15” Without touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303- ID=1101
LCD panel H228 D558
With touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
panel H229 D551
Case 300is-A No slot A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
unit B600 C500
1 slot A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
B601 C501
2 slots A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
B602 C502
310is A5 No slot A02B-0306- A02B-0303-
B600 C500
1 slot A02B-0306- A02B-0303-
B601 C501
2 slots A02B-0306- A02B-0303-
B602 C502
Case 310is-A No slot A02B-0307- A02B-0303-
unit B600 C500
1 slot A02B-0307- A02B-0303-
B601 C501
2 slots A02B-0307- A02B-0303-
B602 C502
320is-A No slot A02B-0308- A02B-0303-
B600 C500
1 slot A02B-0308- A02B-0303-
B601 C501
2 slots A02B-0308- A02B-0303-
B602 C502
A case unit includes a case, back panel, fan, and battery.
6.2.5.3 Others
Name Parent type Drawing number Remarks
Compact 32MB A02B-0303-H151 A87L-0001-0173 Production
Flash card #032MBA discontinued
A87L-0001-0173 Operation
#128MBB guarantee
32MB
64MB A02B-0303-H152 A87L-0001-0173 Production
#064MB discontinued
A87L-0001-0173 Operation
#128MBB guarantee
64MB
167
B-63947EN/01
NOTE
This section contains printed circuit boards and units specific to the
300is/310is/320is. Printed circuit boards and units common to these and
30i/31i/32i series can be found in Subsection 6.1.5, "List of Units and
Printed Circuit Boards".
168
6 HARDWARE
6.2.6 Backup Unit
Specification
Name Specification
Backup unit PCB A20B-2100-0820
Cable for backup unit (for main board C1 to C6) A02B-0281-K801
Cable for backup unit (for main board G1 to G6) A02B-0303-K801
CN9
Front view
When the LED (PC POWER) on the main printed circuit board lights, do
not touch any parts in the basic unit and backup unit. The Series
300is/310is/320is operates for about 12 seconds after the main power is
turned off.
NOTE
For main boards C1 to C6 (cable type: A02B-0281-K801), the backup
interface connector (CA75) and the MDI connector (CA55) on the main
boards are of the same connector shape.
Take care not to insert cables erroneously.
169
B-63947EN/01
Control unit
Servo motor
Servo amplifier
Optical cable
I/O Link
170
6 HARDWARE
6.3.2 Overview of Hardware
4-slot rack 2-slot rack
Main board
Slot 3 Slot 1
Slot 4 Slot 2
171
B-63947EN/01
COP21A,B,M,
DISPLAY(COP21A)
24VDC CP1A CA55 CK27
CP1B
Memory card
(Touch panel)
PANEL i or personal computer
R232-1(JD56A)
RS-232-C I/O device
5th, 6th spindles
R232-2(JD36A)
RS-232-C I/O device
SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
PSM
Position coder
3rd, 4th
spindles
SPM
FSSB(COP10A-2)
COP10B Axis 2
SVM servo motor
COP10A
Axis 3
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A
COP10B Axis 4
SVM servo motor
COP10A
Ethernet
172
6 HARDWARE
When optional boards are provided
Additional spindle
board
Optional slot
SPDL(JA41L)
7th spindle
SPM
FSSB(COP10A-3) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
173
B-63947EN/01
ETHERNET(CD38R) Ethernet
HSSB board
PROFIBUS master
board
PROFI(CN1) Another NC
or another PROFIBUS device
PROFIBUS slave
board
PROFI(CN2) Another NC
or another PROFIBUS device
DeviceNet master
board
DVNET(TBL) Another NC
or another DeviceNet device
DeviceNet slave
board
DVNET(TBL) Another NC
or another DeviceNet device
FL-net board
174
6 HARDWARE
For the is series CNC display unit, the additional connection shown below is
required on the unit.
CNC control unit
Main board
HSSB(COP21A)
MDI unit
(CK27)
MDI(CA55)
HSSB(COP21M)
24V-IN(CPD18)
Ethernet(CD38S) HUB
175
B-63947EN/01
176
6 HARDWARE
Method of detaching the main board
The main board is secured to the control unit by the fan unit. So, when
the fan unit is attached to the control unit, the main board cannot be
detached.
When attaching or detaching the main board, be sure to detach the fan
unit.
177
B-63947EN/01
Block diagram
I/O Link
4ch
To back panel
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
178
6 HARDWARE
LED display
179
B-63947EN/01
Dot
180
6 HARDWARE
Connector mounting location
(1) Display unit A1, A2
Rear of unit
CA55 JA36A
CK20A CN1
COP21A
CK21A
CA79A
CA87A
CA55 COP21A
JA36A
CN1
CK21A
CK20A
181
B-63947EN/01
Rear of unit
CA55 JD36A
CK20A
6
CPD19B
CK21A COP21B
CP1B CP1A
CA79A
CA87A
CP1B CP1A
182
6 HARDWARE
LED display
(1) Board for display unit A1, A2
POWER
(2) POWER (green)
(3) ERROR (red)
ERROR
183
B-63947EN/01
Inverter printed circuit board and touch panel printed circuit board
location
(1) Display unit A1 or A2
Touch panel printed circuit board
(for display unit A2) Inverter printed circuit board
Rear of unit
6
Rear of unit
184
6 HARDWARE
6.3.5.2 15” display unit
- Unit specification
Name Unit specification
15” color LCD C1 (Soft key) A02B-0303-C091
15” color LCD C2 (Soft key, Touch panel) A02B-0303-C092
15” color LCD D1 (Soft key) A02B-0303-C093
15” color LCD D2 (Soft key, Touch panel) A02B-0303-C094
Main board
Name PCB specification
For 15” color LCD C1, C2 A20B-8101-0062
For 15” color LCD D1, D2 A20B-8101-0382
Connector unit
CD38S
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CA98
CA87A
CA95
CD38S
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
185
B-63947EN/01
Connector
Connector
(2) Power supply unit
186
6 HARDWARE
(2) 15” color LCD D1, D2
Connector
Connector
(2) Power supply unit
- LED display
(1) 15” color LCD C1, C2
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
LEDP
BSRDY
COM
(orange) (green)
(green)
(green)
LED1 LED2
(green) (green)
ALM2
(red)
LINK
187
B-63947EN/01
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
DNV7(green)
DNV6(green)
DNV5(green)
LINK(green) ALM2 BSRDY
COM(orange) (red) (green)
188
6 HARDWARE
LED name Meaning
DEV6 (green LED) Reserved
DEV7 (green LED) Reserved
Reserve (Open)
Ensure that this is left open.
(The terminal may not be installed.)
Reserve (Open)
Ensure that this is left open.
(The terminal may not be installed.)
189
B-63947EN/01
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with self-tapping screws.
6
- Inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit mounting location
Inver ter PCB
Fan adapter Connector unit
Rear of unit
190
6 HARDWARE
6.3.6 Display Unit for 300is/310is/320is
6.3.6.1 Main board of display unit for is series CNC
Name Specification
Main board For A13B-0198-B021,
A20B-8101-0061
(15” color LCD specification) -B022
Main board For A13B-0198-B001,
A20B-8101-0063
(10.4”/12.1” color LCD specification) -B002, -B011, -B012
Main board For A13B-0198-B041,
A20B-8101-0380
(10.4” color LCD specification) -B043
Main board For A13B-0198-B051,
A20B-8101-0381
(15” color LCD specification) -B053
Main board For A13B-0198-B061,
A20B-8101-0383
(12.1” color LCD specification) -B063
CA75
or
CD38S CA113
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CA79A CA98
CA87A
CA95 CA75
or
CD38S CA113 CD46L
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
191
B-63947EN/01
Connector
Connector
(2) Power supply unit
192
6 HARDWARE
No. Name Specification Remarks
(3) Compact A87L-0001-0173#032MBA 32MB (production terminated)
Flash card A87L-0001-0173#064MB 64MB (production terminated)
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB 128MB
A87L-0001-0173#256MBB 256MB
A87L-0001-0173#512MBB 512MB
A87L-0001-0173#001GBB 1GB
A87L-0001-0173#002GBB 2GB
- A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
Connector
Connector
(2) Power supply unit
193
B-63947EN/01
Block diagram
- A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
Main board
GUI card
DRAM Display control
CPU
BOOT Compact
software Flash card
6
Peripheral Peripheral Power supply unit
control 2 control 1 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
USB Ethernet
control control
Display unit
USB Ethernet RS232C HSSB 24VDC
Memory card
- A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
Main board
GUI card
DRAM Display control
CPU
BOOT
software
Display unit
RS232C
HSSB 24VDC
Ethernet USB Memory
card
194
6 HARDWARE
LED display
- A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
LEDP
COM
(orange) (green)
BSRDY
(green)
(green)
LED1 LED2
(green) (green)
ALM2
(red)
LINK
195
B-63947EN/01
- A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
DNV7(green)
DNV6(green)
DNV5(green)
LINK(green) ALM2 BSRDY
COM(orange) (red) (green)
196
6 HARDWARE
Jumper plug setting
- A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
Reserve (Open)
Ensure that this is left open.
(The terminal may not be installed.)
- A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
Reserve (Open)
Ensure that this is left open.
(The terminal may not be installed.)
197
B-63947EN/01
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with self-tapping screws.
CPD12
Conversion cable
198
6 HARDWARE
Locations of the inverter and connector unit for a 10.4" LCD
Inverter PCB Connector unit
Rear of unit
Locations of the inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit for a 12.1" LCD
Inverter PCB Fan adapter Connector unit
Rear of unit
199
B-63947EN/01
Locations of the inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit for a 15" LCD
Inverter PCB Fan adapter Connector unit
Rear of unit
NOTE
For the A13B-0198-B001, -B002, -B011, -B012, -B021, and -B022 (cable
type: A02B-0281-K801), the backup interface connector (CA75) and the
MDI connector (CA55) on the main boards are of the same connector
shape.
Take care not to insert cables erroneously.
200
6 HARDWARE
6.3.7 List of Printed Circuit Boards and Units
6.3.7.1 Basic unit
CNC model Name Drawing number Remarks
30i/300i/300is-A Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-B802
Basic unit (4 slots) A02B-0303-B804
31i/310i/310is -A5 Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0306-B802
Basic unit (4 slots) A02B-0306-B804
31i/310i/310is -A Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0307-B802
Basic unit (4 slots) A02B-0307-B804
32i/320i/320is -A Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0308-B802
Basic unit (4 slots) A02B-0308-B804
201
B-63947EN/01
202
6 HARDWARE
15”LCD specification
Specification Name Drawing number Remarks
15” color LCD C1 Main board A20B-8101-0062
(Without touch Display control A20B-3300-0420
panel) card
A02B-0303-C091
Compact A87L-0001-0173#03MBA Production
Flash card discontinued
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
Power supply A20B-8101-0010
unit
Inverter A14L-0143-0002
Connection A660-2005-T469#L200R0
cable between
inverter and
main PCB
Conversion A660-4042-T047
cable
Fan adapter A20B-8100-0969
LCD unit A20B-0303-D519 ID=1101
Production
discontinued
A02B-0303-D529 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
15” color LCD C2 Main board A20B-8101-0062
(With touch panel) Display control A20B-3300-0420
A02B-0303-C092 card
203
B-63947EN/01
Compact A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
Flash card
Power supply A20B-8101-0010
unit
Inverter A14L-0143-0002
Connection A660-2005-T469#L200R0
cable between
inverter and
main PCB
Conversion A660-4042-T047
cable
Fan adapter A20B-8100-0969
LCD unit A20B-0303-D553 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
204
6 HARDWARE
Specification Name Drawing number Remarks
A13B-0198-B002 Main board A20B-8101-0063
10.4” color LCD Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
With touch panel
Inverter A20B-8100-0962
LCD unit A02B-0303-D508 ID=1111
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
205
B-63947EN/01
206
6 HARDWARE
Specification Name Drawing number Remarks
A13B-0198-B061 Main board A20B-8101-0381
15” color LCD Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
Without touch
panel Inverter A14L-0143-0002
Connection cable A660-2005-T469#L200R0
between inverter
and main PCB
Conversion cable A660-4042-T047
Fan adapter A20B-8100-0969
LCD unit A02B-0303-D561 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
GUI card
- A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
Item Parent type Drawing number Remarks
GUI card for DRAM A13B-0198-H140 A20B-3300-0420 ID=0000X1
10.4”/15” LCD 64MB
DRAM A13B-0198-H142 A20B-3300-0421 ID=0001X1
128MB
GUI card for DRAM A13B-0198-H141 A20B-3300-0422 ID=0000X1
12.1” LCD 64MB
DRAM A13B-0198-H143 A20B-3300-0424 ID=0001X1
128MB
- A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
Item Parent type Drawing number Remarks
GUI DRAM 128MB A13B-0198-H145 A20B-3300-0551 ID=0101XX
card DRAM 256MB A13B-0198-H146 A20B-3300-0552 ID=0110XX
207
B-63947EN/01
Backup unit
Name Parent type Drawing number Remarks
Backup A02B-0303-H160 A20B-2100-0820 For mounting at
unit the rear of an
MDI unit
A02B-0303-C161 For mounting
inside a cabinet
Cable A02B-0281-K801 A660-2042-T196#L500R0A For
for A13B-0198-B001,
backup -B002, -B011,
unit -B012, -B021,
-B022
A02B-0303-K801 A660-2006-T312#L500R0 For
A13B-0198-B041,
-B043, -B051,
-B053, -B061,
-B063
208
6 HARDWARE
CNC model Name Drawing number ID
30i/31i/32i/ M series / English / A02B-0303-C125#M 02
300is/310is/320is Standard keyboard
Horizontal type, ONG
T series / English / A02B-0303-C126#T 40
Standard keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
M series / English / A02B-0303-C126#M 02
Standard keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C128 20
QWERTY
300i/310i/ T series / English / A02B-0303-C320#T 40
320i Standard keyboard
Horizontal type, ONG
M series / English / A02B-0303-C320#M 02
Standard keyboard
Horizontal type, ONG
T series / English / A02B-0303-C327#T 40
Standard keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
M series / English / A02B-0303-C327#M 02
Standard keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C328 20
QWERTY
300i/310i/ FA Full keyboard (English) A02B-0236-C131#EC
320i FA Full keyboard (Japanese) A02B-0236-C131#JC
FA Full keyboard (English, A08B-0082-C150#EC
with punch panel cover)
FA Full keyboard (Japanese, A08B-0082-C150#JC
with punch panel cover)
FA Full keyboard (English, A08B-0082-C151#EC
with punch panel)
FA Full keyboard (Japanese, A08B-0082-C151#JC
with punch panel)
6.3.8 I/O
Name Drawing number Remarks
Distributed I/O connector panel A20B-2002-0470 DI/DO: 72/56
I/O module A1 DI=general 16,
matrix 56, with
MPG interface
Distributed I/O connector panel A20B-2002-0520 DI/DO: 48/32, with
I/O module B1 MPG interface
Distributed I/O connector panel A20B-2002-0521 DI/DO: 48/32
I/O module B2
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C001 DI/DO: 24/16
I/O basic module
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C002 DI/DO: 24/16, with
I/O expansion module A MPG interface
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C003 DI/DO: 24/16
I/O expansion module B
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C004 DO: 16 (2A output)
I/O expansion module C
209
B-63947EN/01
6.3.8.1 Others
Name Drawing number Remarks
Separate detector interface unit A02B-0303-C205
(basic 4 axes)
Separate detector interface unit A02B-0236-C204
(additional 4 axes)
Analog input separate detector A06B-6061-C201
interface unit (basic 4 axes)
Optical I/O Link adapter A13B-0154-B001
Optical adapter A13B-0154-B003 For serial spindle
I/O Link connection unit A A20B-2000-0410
I/O Link connection unit B A20B-2000-0411
I/O Link connection unit C A20B-2000-0412
Spindle distributed adapter A13B-0180-B001
PC-side HSSB interface board A20B-8101-0162
(2CH.) Compatible with the PCI bus
210
6 HARDWARE
Name Drawing number Remarks
PC-side HSSB interface board A20B-8101-0163
(1CH.) Compatible with the PCI bus
Fan unit for 2 slots A02B-0303-C101 With fan
A02B-0303-C103
Fan unit for 4 slots A02B-0303-C102 With fan
Fan for basic unit for (2 slots) A02B-0303-K120 40-mm square, 2 pcs
211
B-63947EN/01
NOTE
It is also used as a Data Server.
JG2
S-BUS back-plane connector
CNH6
CD38R
212
6 HARDWARE
LED display
The board is provided with nine LEDs.
The figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below
explains the LED lighting states.
CD38R
ALM (red)
COM (yellow)
LIL (green)
COL (red)
BTX (green)
4(STASUS) (green)
3(STATUS) (green)
2(STATUS) (green)
1(STATUS) (green)
- LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during
power-on)
LED
display Status Meaning
L4L3L2L1
Power-off
Immediately Initial state entered immediately after
after power-on.
power-on If the board is stopped in this condition, the
cause is one of the following:
→ The firmware is not stored in the Flash
ROM of the CNC.
→ The board is defective.
Start of The board has started.
board If the board is stopped in this condition, the
board may be defective.
Completion The firmware has been downloaded to the
of firmware board.
downloading If the board is stopped in this condition, the
board may be defective.
Firmware The firmware OS has started.
OS started. If the board is stopped in this condition, the
cause is one of the following:
→ The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of
the CNC is destroyed.
→ The board is defective.
Completion Initialization of the firmware OS is completed.
of firmware If the board is stopped in this condition, the
OS cause is one of the following:
initialization The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of the
CNC is destroyed.
The board is defective.
213
B-63947EN/01
LED
display Status Meaning
L4L3L2L1
Completion The Ethernet parameters have been read.
of parameter If the board is stopped in this condition, the
reading cause is one of the following:
→ The Ethernet option or Data Server option
is not installed.
→ The IP address or subnet mask is not set.
Start The board has started normally.
completion
- LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal
operation) 6
LED display
Status Meaning
L4L3L2L1
Normal status The board is operating normally.
- LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
LED display Status Meaning
BTX 100BASE-TX connection The communication rate is
in progress 100BASE-TX.
BTX 10BASE-T connection in The communication rate is
progress 10BASE-T.
LIL Connected to hub The board is connected to the
hub.
COM Transmission/reception Data is being transmitted or
in progress received.
ALM No alarm No alarm is issued.
- LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality
occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long on-time
and short on-time.
LED LED
display display
[Long [Short Status Description
on-time] on-time]
4321 4321
Error on another A defect on another board or a
board problem on another board was
detected.
Bus error Software has a problem, or the
board is defective.
Parity alarm The board is defective.
Illegal general Software has a problem, or the
instruction board is defective.
Illegal slot Software has a problem, or the
instruction board is defective.
CPU address error Software has a problem, or the
board is defective.
NOTE
If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off with long on-time and
short on-time in a manner not indicated above, contact FANUC.
214
6 HARDWARE
- LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED Status Description
display
COL Collision occurs. The LED is on or blinks at short intervals
COL (Data collision occurs.) when the Ethernet communication traffic
(communication amount) is high or
ambient noise is high.
LIL Not connected to hub The board is not connected to the hub
properly. The LIL LED stays off also
when the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is connected
to the hub properly.
ALM Parity error occurs. A parity error occurred in memory on the
board. The board is defective.
215
B-63947EN/01
JGP
JD1A
COP10A
CA69A
Block diagram
Servo control
FSSB I/F
BACKPLANE
LED display
JGP
JD1A
COP10A
CA69A
FSSB_OP
216
6 HARDWARE
6.4.1.3 Additional spindle board
Specification
Name Specification
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320
JGP
(JA41L: Additional spindle board B only)
JA41L
Block diagram
Spindle control
Serial spindle
BACKPLANE
217
B-63947EN/01
JGP
6
COP21N
Block diagram
LED display
LEDR (red)
BRDYA (green)
LED Meaning
LEDR Lights to indicate a common RAM parity alarm
condition in the LSC.
BRDYA Lights to indicate that a link has been established.
218
6 HARDWARE
6.4.1.5 FL-net board
Specification
Name Specification
FL-net board A20B-8101-0031
LSI
MPU
CD38N
219
B-63947EN/01
6
CD38N
ALM (red)
COM (yellow)
LIL (green)
COL (red)
BTX (green)
4(POK) (STASUS) (green)
NOTE
The face plate is indicated with dotted line.
- LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during
power-on)
LED
display Status Meaning
4321
Power-off
Immediately after Initial state entered immediately after
power-on power-on.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the
cause is one of the following:
→ The firmware is not stored in the Flash
ROM of the CNC.
→ The board is defective.
Start of board The board has started.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the
board may be defective.
Completion of The firmware has been downloaded to the
firmware board.
downloading If the board is stopped in this condition, the
board may be defective.
Firmware OS The firmware OS has started.
started. If the board is stopped in this condition, the
cause is one of the following:
→ The firmware stored in the Flash ROM
of the CNC is destroyed.
→ The board is defective.
220
6 HARDWARE
LED
display Status Meaning
4321
Completion of Initialization of the firmware OS is completed.
firmware OS If the board is stopped in this condition, the
initialization cause is one of the following:
→ The firmware stored in the Flash ROM
of the CNC is destroyed.
→ The board is defective.
◊◊ Start completion The board has started normally.
- LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal
operation)
LED display Status Meaning
ROS Normal software Blinks at 1-second intervals when the
operation communication software on the
FL-net board operates normally.
RES Normally OFF Normally, off
LNK Participating in network Turned on when the node participates
in the FL-net network
POK Normal parameters Turned on when all FL-net
parameters are valid.
- LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
LED display Status Meaning
BTX 10BASE-T connection The communication rate is
in progress 10BASE-T.
LIL Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.
COM Transmission/reception Data is being transmitted or received.
in progress
ALM No alarm No alarm is issued.
(HER)
-LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality
occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long on-time
and short on-time.
LED display LED display
[Long on-time] [Short on-time] Status Description
4321 4321
Error on A defect on another board or
another board a problem on another board
was detected.
Bus error Software has a problem, or
the board is defective.
Parity alarm The board is defective.
Illegal general Software has a problem, or
instruction the board is defective.
Illegal slot Software has a problem, or
instruction the board is defective.
CPU address Software has a problem, or
error the board is defective.
NOTE
If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off with long on-time and
short on-time in a manner not indicated above, contact FANUC.
221
B-63947EN/01
- LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED display Status Description
COL Collision occurs. When a data collision occurs on the
COL (Data collision occurs.) network, the LED is lit or blinks. (Note)
LIL Not connected to hub The board is not connected to the hub
properly. The LIL LED stays off also
when the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is
connected to the hub properly.
ALM Parity error occurs. A parity error occurred in memory on
(HER) the board. The board is defective.
NOTE 6
The FL-net manages the token-based transmission right so that no
collision occurs. If this LED is turned on frequently, a communication error
has occurred due to noise, or an Ethernet compliant product other than the
FL-net is connected.
In such a case, check the devices connected to the network and the
network installation status.
222
6 HARDWARE
6.4.1.6 PROFIBUS board
Specification
Name Specification Remarks
PROFIBUS Master board A20B-8101-0050 Master function only
PROFIBUS Slave board A20B-8101-0100 Slave function only
MPU
DC/DC
converter
LSI
CN1
LSI
DC/DC
converter
LSI
CN2
LSI
CN1
LED2 LED1
NOTE
The face plate is indicated with dotted line.
223
B-63947EN/01
CN2
NOTE
The face plate is indicated with dotted line.
224
6 HARDWARE
6.4.1.7 DeviceNet board
Specification
Name Specification Remarks
DeviceNet Master board A20B-8101-0220
DeviceNet Slave board A20B-8101-0330
LSI
Daughter board
From left to right
LEDWD
LED3
LED2 NS MS (LED)
LED1
LED0
Face plate
- Slave board
LED
(green) LED3
(green) LED2
(green) LED1
(green) LED0
LED
(green)
(green)
LEDWD (red)
(red)
(red)
MS NS
Face plate
225
B-63947EN/01
LED display transition for LED0, LED1, LED2, and LED3 (during
power-on)
LED
State and cause when Action when stopped after
display
stopped after power-on power-on
L3L2L1L0
Power-off
After power-on, the Store the DeviceNet application
DeviceNet application software in the Flash ROM of the
software does not start. CNC.
Initializing the firmware on Replace the DeviceNet master
the daughter board. board.
Checking memory on the
daughter board.
Recognizing the firmware
on the daughter board.
Reading DeviceNet Enable the DeviceNet master
parameters. function (software option).
Verifying that DeviceNet Set DeviceNet parameter
parameter "NETWORK" is "NETWORK" to "ONLINE."
set to "ONLINE."
Setting the bus parameter Replace the DeviceNet master
in DeviceNet parameters. board.
Setting the slave Set the slave parameter in
parameter in DeviceNet DeviceNet parameters correctly.
parameters. Or, replace the DeviceNet master
board.
Checking duplicate MAC Check duplication with the MAC
IDs. ID of a slave device. Check if
cables are connected correctly.
Check if power for
communication is correctly
supplied. Check if slave devices
are turned on.
The DeviceNet application
software has been
initialized and I/O
communication starts.
226
6 HARDWARE
LED indication of LEDWD
LED display Status Meaning
Daughter board The daughter board failed.
failure Replace the DeviceNet master board.
227
B-63947EN/01
228
6 HARDWARE
LED State and cause when Action when stopped after
display stopped after power-on power-on
L3L2L1L0
The board firmware has Remove the noise factor and then
been initialized. turn the slave power off and back
on again. When the error persists,
replace the DeviceNet slave board.
A line baud rate check These faults are recoverable.
is in progress. When communication is normally
A MAC ID duplication established, the status changes to
check is in progress. "I/O communication is normal".
Each status corresponds to
Waiting for I/O DeviceNet MPU status transition
communication to be (Note)
.
established.
I/O communication is
normal.
I/O communication has
timed out.
I/O communication is
idle.
NOTE
When a transition to the "I/O communication normal" status is not made,
confirm that the power for communication is correctly supplied because a
network power failure may have occurred.
229
B-63947EN/01
NOTE
When a transition to the “I/O communication normal” status is not made,
confirm that the power for communication is correctly supplied because a
network power failure may have occurred.
230
6 HARDWARE
LED display Status Error and action
MS (green) Other Remove the noise factor and then turn the
MS (red) unrecoverable slave power off and back on again.
NS ◊ (green) onboard When the error persists, replace the
NS ◊ (red) failures DeviceNet slave board.
1 For the LCD-mounted, 2-slot type and the stand-alone , 2-slot type
Check the optional boards to be mounted with table 1, and mount
the optional board with the smallest number to slot 1, the one with
the second smallest number to slot 2, and so on.
2 For the stand-alone, 4-slot type
Check the optional boards to be mounted with table 1, and mount
them to slots 1, 3, 4, and 2 in the order of smallest to largest
number.
Table 6.4.1.8
No. Name
1 PROFIBUS master board
2 Fast Ethernet board (Also used as a data server.)
3 FL-net board
4 DeviceNet master board
5 DeviceNet slave board
6 PROFIBUS slave board
7 HSSB board
8 Additional spindle board
9 Additional axis board
Slot 3 Slot 1
Slot 4 Slot 2
231
B-63947EN/01
6
JF101 (JF105)
JF102 (JF106)
JF103 (JF107)
JF104 (JF108)
JA4A
232
6 HARDWARE
LED display
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit case.
Two green LEDs (POWER and LINK) and two red LEDs (ERR1 and
ERR2) are provided. The figure below shows the locations of these
LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states.
POWER
ERR1,ERR2 LINK
- LED indication
No. LED Meaning
1 POWER Turned on when the power is on
2 LINK Turned on when FSSB communication is performed
3 ERR1 Turned on when COP10A (back stage) is disconnected
4 ERR2 Turned on when COP10B (front stage) is disconnected
233
B-63947EN/01
6
JF111
JF112
JF113
JF114
JA4A
234
6 HARDWARE
LED display
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit case.
Two green LEDs (POWER and LINK) and two red LEDs (ERR1 and
ERR2) are provided. The figure below shows the locations of these
LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states.
POWER
ERR1,ERR2 LINK
LED indication
No. LED Meaning
1 POWER Turned on when the power is on
2 LINK Turned on when FSSB communication is performed
3 ERR1 Turned on when COP10A (back stage) is disconnected
4 ERR2 Turned on when COP10B (front stage) is disconnected
235
7 PARAMETERS
7.1 HOW TO ENTER THE PARAMETERS
Setting procedure of parameters
Parameter writing is enabled with following steps 1 to 3.
1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.
2 Press function key several times or press soft key [SETING]
to display SETTING (HANDY) screen.
3 Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press and
keys in this order. Here alarm 100 will be displayed.
4 Press function key several times to display the following
screen.
(To make the cursor display in bit unit, press the cursor keys
or .)
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is
displayed.
<1> Soft key [NO.SRH] :
Searched by number.
Example) Parameter number → [NO.SRH]
<2> Soft key [ON : 1] :
Item with cursor position is set to 1. (Bit parameter only)
<3> Soft key [OFF : 0] :
Item with cursor position is set to 0. (Bit parameter only)
<4> Soft key [+INPUT] :
Input value is added to the value at cursor. (Word type only)
<5> Soft key [INPUT] :
Input value is replaced with the value at cursor.
<6> Soft key [READ] :
Parameters are input from reader/puncher interface.
<7> Soft key [PUNCH] :
Parameters are output to reader/puncher interface.
6 After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE on
the SETTING screen to 0. Press key to release alarm 100.
7 Convenient method
<1> To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor move key
or , then the cursor becomes bit length and you can set
parameters bit by bit (Bit parameter only).
237
B-63947EN/01
(Example 2)
238
7 PARAMETERS
7.2 PARAMETER LIST
7.2.1 Setting ................................................................... (No. 00000~)
7.2.2 DNC1/DNC2 Interface ........................................... (No. 00300~)
7.2.3 System Configuration ............................................ (No. 00980~)
7.2.4 Axis Control ........................................................... (No. 01000~)
7.2.5 Coordinate System ................................................ (No. 01201~)
7.2.6 Stroke Limit Check................................................. (No. 01300~)
7.2.7 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier ................................. (No. 01330~)
7.2.8 Feedrate ................................................................ (No. 01401~)
7.2.9 Acceleration/Deceleration Control.......................... (No. 01601~)
7.2.10 Servo ..................................................................... (No. 01800~)
7.2.11 DI/DO .................................................................... (No. 03001~)
7.2.12 Display and Edit..................................................... (No. 03100~)
7.2.13 Programs ............................................................... (No. 03400~)
7.2.14 Pitch Error Compensation...................................... (No. 03601~)
7.2.15 Spindle Control ...................................................... (No. 03700~)
7.2.16 Serial Spindle ........................................................ (No. 04000~)
7.2.17 Spindle Control 2 ................................................... (No. 04800~)
7.2.18 Tool Compensation................................................ (No. 05000~)
7.2.19 Canned Cycle ........................................................ (No. 05101~)
7.2.20 Rigid Tapping ........................................................ (No. 05200~)
7.2.21 Scaling/Coordinate Rotation .................................. (No. 05400~)
7.2.22 Single Direction Positioning ................................... (No. 05431~)
7.2.23 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ............................... (No. 05450~)
7.2.24 Normal Direction Control........................................ (No. 05480~)
7.2.25 Index Table............................................................ (No. 05500~)
7.2.26 Involute Interpolation ............................................. (No. 05610~)
7.2.27 Exponential Interpolation ....................................... (No. 05630~)
7.2.28 Flexible Synchronous Control ................................ (No. 05660~)
7.2.29 Straightness Compensation................................... (No. 05700~)
7.2.30 Inclination Compensation....................................... (No. 05861~)
7.2.31 Custom Macros...................................................... (No. 06000~)
7.2.32 Skip Functions ....................................................... (No. 06200~)
7.2.33 External Data Input ................................................ (No. 06300~)
7.2.34 Manual Handle Retrace ......................................... (No. 06400~)
7.2.35 Graphic Display ..................................................... (No. 06510~)
7.2.36 Screen Display Colors ........................................... (No. 06581~)
7.2.37 Run Hour and Parts Count Display ........................ (No. 06700~)
7.2.38 Tool Life Management ........................................... (No. 06800~)
7.2.39 Position Switch ...................................................... (No. 06900~)
7.2.40 Manual/Automatic Operation Functions ................. (No. 07001~)
7.2.41 Manual Handle ...................................................... (No. 07181~)
7.2.42 Reference Position with Mechanical Stopper ......... (No. 07100~)
7.2.43 Software Operator's Panel ..................................... (No. 07200~)
7.2.44 Program Restart .................................................... (No. 07300~)
7.2.45 Software Operator's Panel 2 .................................. (No. 07352~)
7.2.46 High-speed Cutting ................................................ (No. 07501~)
7.2.47 Fixture Offset ......................................................... (No. 07570~)
7.2.48 Polygon Turning..................................................... (No. 07600~)
7.2.49 Electric Gear Box (EGB) ........................................ (No. 07700~)
7.2.50 Axis Control by PMC.............................................. (No. 08001~)
7.2.51 Multi-path............................................................... (No. 08100~)
7.2.52 Interference Check for Each Path .......................... (No. 08140~)
7.2.53 Synchronous/Composite Control and
Superimposed Control ........................................... (No. 08160~)
7.2.54 Angular Axis Control .............................................. (No. 08200~)
7.2.55 Axis Synchronous Control...................................... (No. 08301~)
7.2.56 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop.............. (No. 08341~)
7.2.57 Chopping ............................................................... (No. 08360~)
7.2.58 AI Contour Control ................................................. (No. 08451~)
7.2.59 High-speed Position Switch ................................... (No. 08500~)
7.2.60 Others.................................................................... (No. 08650~)
7.2.61 Maintenance .......................................................... (No. 08900~)
7.2.62 Macro Executor...................................................... (No. 09000~)
7.2.63 Wrong Operation Prevention Function ................... (No. 10000~)
7.2.64 Screen Display Colors 2 ........................................ (No. 10421~)
239
B-63947EN/01
NOTE
1 With some parameter numbers, the range of setting is restricted.
2 Some parameters can be entered on the setting screen.
3 In the description of a bit parameter, the explanation on the left side of a
slash (/) corresponds to the setting of 0, and the explanation on the right
side corresponds to the setting of 1.
4 <Axis> indicated for a parameter in the right-hand column of the parameter
table means that the parameter is specified for each axis.
5 <T series> indicated for a parameter in the right-hand column of the
parameter table means that the parameter can be used only with a lathe
system. Similarly, <M series> indicated for a parameter in the right-hand
column of the parameter table means that the parameter can be used only
with a machining center system.
240
7 PARAMETERS
7.2.1 Setting
(The parameters below can be set on the setting screen.)
00000 Setting
#0 TVC TV check is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
#1 ISO The code used for data output is, EIA code (0) / ISO
code(1)
#2 INI The unit of input is, mm (0) / inch (1)
#5 SEQ Automatic insertion of sequence numbers is, not
performed (0) / performed (1)
00001 Tape format
#1 FCV FS16 standard format (0) / FS15 format (1)
00002 Reference position return, Remote diagnosis
#7 SJZ For manual reference position return, deceleration M series
dogs are used when a reference position is not PRM
established, and positioning is performed when a 1005#3=1
reference position is established (0) / deceleration
dogs are used at all times (1)
00010 Output format
#0 PZS When a part program is punched out, the O number is,
not zero-suppressed (0) / zero-suppressed (1)
#1 PRM When parameters are output, the parameters whose
values are 0 are, output (0) / not output (1)
#2 PEC When pitch error compensation data is output, the
data whose value is 0 is, output (0) / not output (1)
00012 Axis detach, Move command, Mirror image <Axis>
#0 MIR Mirror image for each axis is, OFF (0) / ON (1) PRM
#7 RMV Assignment of the control axis for each axis is, not 1005#7=1
released (0) / released (1)
00020 Selection of an input/output device, Selection of a PRM110#0
foreground input device
Setting Description (I/O device selected)
0 Channel 0 (RS-232-C serial port 1)
1 Channel 1 (RS-232-C serial port 1)
2 Channel 2 (RS-232-C serial port 2)
4 Memory card
5 Data Server
6 DNC operation is performed or M198 is specified by
FOCAS2/Ethernet.
15 M198 is specified by FOCAS2/HSSB.
(Parameter (No. 8706#1) = 1)
16 DNC operation is performed or M198 is specified by
FOCAS2/HSSB (PORT2).
20 to 35 Data is transferred to and from a Power Mate CNC
manager in group n (n: 0 to 15) via the I/O Link.
[Setting value 20 → Group 1]
Specifi-
Setting Common Output Transfer Transfer
cation Connector
value setting format rate method
number
0 No.101 No.102 No.103 JD36A
1 No.100 No.111 No.112 No.113 Not set
2 No.121 No.122 No.123 JD36B
00021 Foreground output device setting
00022 Background input device setting
00023 Background output device setting
00024 Setting of communication with the ladder development
tool (FANUC LADDER-III, ladder editing package)
0 The settings on the PMC online monitor setting screen are not
modified.
1 RS-232-C serial port 1 (JD36A)
2 RS-232-C serial port 2 (JD36B)
10 High-speed interface (HSSB(COP7) or Ethernet)
11 High-speed interface or RS-232-C serial port 1
12 High-speed interface or RS-232-C serial port 2
255 Communication is terminated forcibly (as with the [EMGSTP]
soft key).
241
B-63947EN/01
242
7 PARAMETERS
00960 Power Mate CNC manager
#1 MD1 The input/output destination of slave parameters is, PRM
program memory (0) / memory card (1) 960#2=0
#2 MD2 The parameter is, always set to 0 (0) / reserved (1)
MD2 MD1
0 0 Program memory
0 1 Memory card
#3 PMN The Power Mate CNC manager is, enabled (0) /
disabled (1)
#4 PPE Slave parameter setting by the Power Mate CNC
manager, is always possible (0) / follows the setting of
PWE of the host CNC (1)
00961 I/O LINK β, Program number
#3 PMO The O number of a program for saving and restoring
the I/O Link β parameter is set based on, group
number and channel number (0) / group number only
(1)
243
B-63947EN/01
244
7 PARAMETERS
01013 Least input increment <Axis>
#0 ISA Increment system ISE ISD ISC ISA
#1 ISC IS-A 0 0 0 1
#2 ISD IS-B 0 0 0 0
#3 ISE IS-C 0 0 1 0
IS-D 0 1 0 0
IS-E 1 0 0 0
#7 IESP When IS-E or IS-D is used, the input values of
speed-related parameters, cannot be increased (0)
/ can be increased (1)
01014 PMC axis control, Cs axis contour control <Axis>
#7 CDM The Cs contour control axis is, not a virtual Cs axis
(0) / virtual Cs axis (1)
01015 Reference position return, Workpiece origin offset,
Increment system
#4 ZRL In automatic reference position return (G28), the PRM
tool path from the middle point to the reference 1401#1=1
position and machine coordinate positioning (G53)
are based on, positioning of nonlinear interpolation
type (0) / positioning of linear interpolation type (1)
#6 WIC In direct input of a measured workpiece origin M series
offset, an external workpiece origin offset is, not
considered (0) / considered (1)
#7 DWT When a dwell time is specified by P, the time
depends on the increment system (0) / does not
depends on the increment system (1 ms) (1)
01020 Program axis name for each axis <Axis>
X : 88 Y : 89 Z : 90
A : 65 B : 66 C : 67
U : 85 V : 86 W :87
01022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system <Axis>
0 : Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis
1 : X axis of the basic three axes
2 : Y axis of the basic three axes
3 : Z axis of the basic three axes
5 : Axis parallel to the X axis
6 : Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 : Axis parallel to the Z axis
01023 Number of the servo axis for each axis <Axis>
01025 Servo axis name 2 for each axis <Axis>
01026 Servo axis name 3 for each axis PRM
1000#0=1
01031 Reference axis
245
B-63947EN/01
246
7 PARAMETERS
#7 BFA When a stored stroke check alarm, inter-path
interference alarm, or chuck/tail stock barrier alarm is
issued, the tool stops, after entering the prohibited
area (0) / before entering the prohibited area (1)
01301 Stored limit check before move
#0 DLM The stored stroke limit switching signals G104 and EXLM
G105 for each axial direction are, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#2 NPC As part of the stroke limit check performed before Stroke
movement, the movement specified in G31 (skip) and before
G37 (automatic tool length measurement) blocks is, movement
checked (0) / not checked (1)
#4 OF1 If the tool is moved into the range allowed on the axis
after an OT alarm is raised by stored stroke check 1,
the alarm is not canceled before a reset is made (0) /
the alarm is immediately canceled (1)
#6 OTS When the overtravel alarm is issued, no signal is
output to the PMC (0) / the overtravel alarm signal is
output to the PMC (1)
#7 PLC Stroke check before movement is, not performed (0) /
performed (1)
01310 Stored stroke check for each axis <Axis>
#0 OT2 Stored stroke check 2 for each axis is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#1 OT3 Stored stroke check 3 for each axis is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
01311 Stored stroke check <Axis>
#0 DOT Stored stroke check immediately after power-on is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
01320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the <Axis>
positive direction on each axis [Increment system]
01321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the <Axis>
negative direction on each axis [Increment system]
01322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the <Axis>
positive direction on each axis [Increment system]
01323 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the <Axis>
negative direction on each axis [Increment system]
01324 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the <Axis>
positive direction on each axis [Increment system]
01325 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the <Axis>
negative direction on each axis [Increment system]
01326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the <Axis>
positive direction on each axis [Increment system] PRM
01327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the 1300#2
negative direction on each axis [Increment system] 1301#0
247
B-63947EN/01
7.2.8 Feedrate
01401 Feedrate
#0 RPD Manual rapid traverse before completion of return to
the reference position is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 LRP Positioning (G00) is, nonlinear (0) / linear (1)
#2 JZR Manual return to the reference position at the JOG
feedrate is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
#4 RF0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid
traverse, the machine tool, does not stop moving (0) /
stops moving (1)
#5 TDR Dry run during thread cutting and canned cycles (G74,
G84) is, enabled (0) / disabled (1) 7
#6 RDR Dry run for a rapid traverse command is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
01402 Manual per revolution feed
#0 NPC Feed per revolution without the position coder is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 JOV Jog override is, enabled (0) / disabled (tied to 100%)
(1)
#3 OV2 The secondary feedrate override is, 1% (0) / 0.01% (1)
#4 JRV Jog feed or incremental feed is performed, at feed per
minute (0) / at feed per revolution (1)
01403 Thread cutting, Helical interpolation
#3 EDT The corner control function (for the gas stopper) is, M series
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 ROC Rapid traverse override for retraction after threading T series
is, enabled (0) / disabled (100%) (1)
#5 HTG The feedrate for helical interpolation/helical involute
interpolation/3-dimensional circular interpolation is
specified, using the feedrate along the tangent to an
arc/involute curve/ 3-dimensional arc (0) / using the
feedrate along axes including a linear axis (1)
#7 RTV Overriding during retraction in a threading cycle, is T series
enabled (0) / disabled (1)
01404 Manual reference position return, Increment system
#1 DLF After a reference position has been established, a PRM
manual reference position return operation is 1420,1424
performed, at the rapid traverse rate (0) / at the
manual rapid traverse rate (1)
#2 FM3 The increment system of an F command without a T series
decimal point in feed per minute is, [1 mm/min] (0.01
inch/min for inch input) (0) / [0.001 mm/min] (0.00001
inch/min for inch input) (1)
01405 Increment system, Feedrate
#1 FR3 The increment system of an F command without a M series
decimal point in feed per revolution is,
[0.01 mm/rev] (0.0001 inch/rev for inch input) (0) /
[0.001 mm/rev] (0.00001 inch/rev for inch input)(1)
#2 PCL The function for constant surface speed control is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#5 EDR As the external deceleration rate for positioning of PRM
linear interpolation type, the external deceleration rate 1426,1427
for cutting feed is used (0) / the external deceleration
rate for the 1st axis in rapid traverse is used (1)
01406 External deceleration
#0 EX2 External deceleration function setting 2 is, invalid (0) /
valid (1)
#1 EX3 External deceleration function setting 3 is, invalid (0) /
valid (1)
248
7 PARAMETERS
01408 Feedrate on a rotary axis, Unit of cutting feedrate <Axis>
#0 RFD Feedrate control on a rotary axis is exercised, using
the conventional method (0) / the method that
specifies a feedrate on the virtual circle of the rotary
axis (1)
#3 IRC The increment system for a parameter (No. 1430/No. PRM
1432) for specifying a maximum cutting feedrate is, 11000#7=1
not multiplied by 10 (0) / multiplied by 10 (1)
01410 Dry run rate [mm/min]
01411 Cutting feedrate [mm/min]
M series
01414 Feedrate for retrace [mm/min]
<Axis>
M series
01420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [mm/min] <Axis>
01421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis <Axis>
[mm/min]
01423 Feedrate in jog feed for each axis [mm/min] <Axis>
01424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis [mm/min] <Axis>
01425 FL rate of the reference position return for each axis <Axis>
[mm/min]
01426 External deceleration rate of cutting feed [mm/min] PRM
1005#4,#5
01427 External deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each <Axis>
axis [mm/min] PRM
1005#4,#5
01428 Reference position return feedrate before a reference <Axis>
position is established M series
Before reference After reference position
position establishment establishment
Reference position Not Not
Applied Applied
return feedrate (1428) applied applied
G28 PRM PRM
G00 1420 1420
Manual Without PRM PRM
reference dogs PRM 1428 1420, 1424 (*2)
position 1424 PRM
return With dogs PRM 1428
1424
Manual rapid traverse PRM 1423, 1424 (*1) PRM 1424
249
B-63947EN/01
250
7 PARAMETERS
#2 AOFF When AI contour control I and II are disabled and the PRM
parameter for the advanced preview feed-forward 1604#0=0
function is valid, this function is, enabled (0) / disabled
(1)
#3 TCO In a threading cycle, rapid traverse overlap operation PRM1726
is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
01612 Rapid traverse block overlap
#0 PRO For a deceleration reduction ratio for overlapping PRM
rapid traverse blocks, parameter No. 1722 is used (0) 1601#4=1
/ system variables #100851[#_ROVLP[1]] to
#100900[#_ROVLP[50]] are used (1)
01620 Time constant T or T1 used for linear acc./dec. or <Axis>
bell-shaped acc./dec. in rapid traverse for each axis
[ms]
01621 Time constant T2 used for bell-shaped acc./dec. in <Axis>
rapid traverse for each axis [ms]
01622 Time constant of acc./dec. in cutting feed for each <Axis>
axis [ms] PRM
1610#0,#1
01623 FL rate of exponential acc./dec. in cutting feed for <Axis>
each axis [mm/min]
01624 Time constant of acc./dec. in jog feed for each axis <Axis>
[ms]
01625 FL rate of exponential acc./dec. in jog feed for each <Axis>
axis [mm/min]
01626 Acceleration/deceleration time constant in threading <Axis>
cycles for each axis [ms]
01627 FL rate for acc./dec. in threading cycles for each axis <Axis>
[mm/min]
01650 Acceleration/deceleration signal timer [ms] M series
01660 Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acc./dec. <Axis>
before interpolation for each axis [mm/sec2]
01671 Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acc./dec. <Axis>
before interpolation for linear rapid traverse for each
axis, or maximum allowable reference acceleration
rate in optimum torque acc./dec. [mm/sec2]
01672 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acc./dec. PRM1671
before interpolation for linear rapid traverse, or
acceleration change time of bell-shaped acc./dec. in
optimum torque acc./dec. [ms]
01710 Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for inner circular
cutting feedrate change by automatic corner override
[%]
01711 Inner determination angle (θp) for inner corner
override [deg]
01712 Override value for inner corner override [%]
01713 Start distance (Le) for inner corner override
01714 End distance (Ls) for inner corner override
01722 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for <Axis>
overlapping rapid traverse blocks [%] PRM
1601#4=1
01726 Rapid traverse rate reduction ratio for overlapping <Axis>
threading cycle blocks [%] PRM
1611#3=1
01732 Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration PRM1735
function based on acceleration in circular interpolation Involute
[mm/min] interpolation
01735 Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the <Axis>
deceleration function based on acceleration in circular Involute
interpolation for each axis [mm/sec2] interpolation
01737 Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the <Axis>
deceleration function based on acceleration in AI PRM1735
contour control for each axis [mm/sec2]
251
B-63947EN/01
7.2.10 Servo
01800 Backlash compensation applied separately for
cutting feed and rapid traverse, DRDY alarm
#1 CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is on ALM
before position control ready signal PRDY comes SV0401
on, an alarm is generated (0) / no alarm is
generated (1)
#3 FFR Feed-forward control in rapid traverse is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 RBK Backlash compensation applied separately for PRM
cutting feed and rapid traverse is, not performed 1851,1852
(0) / performed (1)
01801 In-position width at cutting
#4 CCI Parameter number setting for in-position width at
cutting time
#5 CIN CIN CCI PRM1826 PRM1827
0 0 Same as rapid traverse (Not used)
1 0 Same as rapid traverse (Not used)
When the next block When the next block
0 1 specifies an operation other specifies cutting feed
than cutting feed
When rapid traverse is When cutting feed is
1 1 performed, independently performed, independently
of the next block of the next block
252
7 PARAMETERS
01803 Torque control
#0 TQI Within a torque limit, an in-position check is,
made (0) / not made (1)
#1 TQA Within a torque limit, an excessive stop-time /
move-time error is, checked (0) / not checked (1)
#4 TQF When torque control is performed by the PMC
axis control, follow-up operation is, not performed
(0) / performed (1)
#7 NFP If position matching between the machine
position and absolute position detector is not
performed even once, follow-up operation is, not
performed (0) / performed (1)
01804 VRDY OFF ignore signal
#4 IVO When an attempt is made to release an
emergency stop state while the VRDY OFF alarm
ignore signal is 1, the emergency stop state is not
released until the signal is set to 0 (0) / the
emergency stop state is released immediately (1)
#5 ANA When an unexpected disturbance torque is PRM1881
detected for an axis, movement along all axes is
stopped and a servo alarm is issued (0) / no
servo alarm is issued and movement along only
the axes of the group containing the axis with the
unexpected disturbance torque is stopped in
interlock mode (1)
#6 SAK When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal
IGNVRY is 1, or when the IGNVRY signals for all
axes are 1, the servo ready signal SA is, "0" (0) /
"1" (1)
01805 PMC axis torque control
#1 TRE When parameter (No. 1803#4) is set to 0, the PRM1885
servo error counter is, updated (0) / not updated ALM
(1) SV0423
SV0422
#3 TSA As the unexpected disturbance torque detection PRM
level during dwell, M code execution, and 2142, 2104
automatic operation halt state, the threshold 2200#3=1
value for rapid traverse is used (0) / the threshold
value for cutting feed is used (1)
#4 TSM As the unexpected disturbance torque detection PRM
level in the jog feed mode (excluding manual 2142, 2104
rapid traverse) and manual handle feed mode, 2200#3=1
the threshold value for rapid traverse is used (0) /
the threshold value for cutting feed is used (1)
01814 Cs axis contour control <Axis>
#7 ALG The servo axis loop gain in the Cs contour control
mode is, not matched with the Cs contour control
loop gain (0) / matched with the Cs contour
control loop gain (1)
01815 Position detector <Axis>
#1 OPT As a position detector, a separate Pulsecoder is,
not used (0) / used (1)
#2 DCL As a separate position detector, a linear scale
with reference marks or a linear scale with an
absolute address zero point is, not used (0) /
used (1)
#3 DCR As a scale with absolute address reference PRM
marks, a rotary encoder with absolute address 1815#2
reference marks is, not used (0) / used (1)
#4 APZ When an absolute position detector is used,
matching with the machine position is, not
completed (0) / completed (1)
#5 APC The position detector is, not an absolute position
detector (0) / an absolute position detector (1)
253
B-63947EN/01
254
7 PARAMETERS
01825 Servo loop gain for each axis [0.01sec-1] <Axis>
Usually,3000
01826 In-position width for each axis [Detection unit] <Axis>
01827 In-position width in cutting feed for each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit] PRM1801#4
=1
01828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in <Axis>
movement [Detection unit] PRM
Setting =
Rapid traverse
×
1
× 1.2
1420,1825
60 × Servo loop gain Detection unit
01829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the <Axis>
stopped state [Detection unit]
01830 Positional deviation limit at servo-off time for <Axis>
each axis [Detection unit] PRM1829
01832 Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit]
01836 Servo error amount where reference position <Axis>
return is possible [Detection unit] Usually set 0.
01838 Positional deviation limit for each axis during <Axis>
movement in safety monitoring [Detection unit]
01839 Positional deviation limit for each axis during halt <Axis>
in safety monitoring [Detection unit]
01840 Positional deviation limit for each axis at servo-off <Axis>
time [Detection unit]
01841 Positional deviation limit for each axis during <Axis>
movement in other than safety monitoring PRM1828
[Detection unit]
01842 Positional deviation limit for each axis during halt <Axis>
in other than safety monitoring [Detection unit] PRM1829
01844 Distance to the 1st grid point after the <Axis>
deceleration dog is turned off in the case where PRM1850
the reference position shift amount of the
reference position shift function is 0
[Detection unit]
01846 Distance for starting the 2nd stage of smooth <Axis>
backlash compensation [Detection unit]
01847 Distance for ending the 2nd stage of smooth <Axis>
backlash compensation [Detection unit]
01848 Value of the 1st stage of smooth backlash <Axis>
compensation [Detection unit]
01850 Grid shift and reference position shift for each <Axis>
axis [Detection unit] PRM1008#4
01851 Backlash compensating value for each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit]
01852 Backlash compensating value used for rapid <Axis>
traverse for each axis [Detection unit] PRM1800#4
Cutting feed to Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Cutting feed to
cutting feed to rapid traverse to cutting feed rapid traverse
Same direction 0 0 ±α ±(-α)
Opposite direction ±A ±B ±(B+α) ±(B+α)
A: Backlash amount in cutting feed
B: Backlash amount in rapid traverse
α=(A-B)/2
* The positive or negative direction for
compensating values is the direction of
movement.
01874 Numerator of the conversion coefficient for <Axis>
inductosyn position detection, or numerator of
the flexible feed gear for the built-in operation
detector in temporary absolute coordinate setting
01875 Denominator of the conversion coefficient for <Axis>
inductosyn position detection, or denominator of
the flexible feed gear for the built-in position
detector in temporary absolute coordinate setting
255
B-63947EN/01
256
7 PARAMETERS
02001 Arbitrary AMR <Axis>
#0 AMR0 AMR AMR AMR AMR AMR AMR AMR PRM
#1 AMR1 Motor 2112
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#2 AMR2 2138
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 αi/βi motor
#3 AMR3
#4 AMR4
#5 AMR5
#6 AMR6
02002 Separate detector <Axis>
#3 PFSE A separate position detector is, not used (0) / Automatically
used (1) set by
parameter
(No. 1815#1)
02003 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#1 TGAL The detection level for the position detection PRM2064
disconnection alarm is, set to the standard value
(0) / set by another parameter (1)
#2 OBEN The velocity control observer is, not used (0) / PRM2047,
used (1) 2050, 2051
#3 PIEN Velocity control is based on, I-P control (0) / PI
control (1)
#4 NPSP The N pulse suppression function is, not used (0)
/ used (1)
#5 BLEN The backlash acceleration function is, not used PRM2048
(0) / used (1)
#6 OVSC Overshoot compensation is, not used (0) / used PRM2045
(1)
#7 VOFS VCMD is, not offset (0) / offset (1)
02004 Control method setting <Axis>
#0 TIA0 TRW1 TRW0 TIB0 TIA0 Control method PRM
#1 TIB0 0 0 1 1 HRV2,3,4 control N2013#0
#2 TRW0 N2014#0
#3 TRW1
02005 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#1 FEED The feed-forward function is, not used (0) / used PRM
(1) 2068, 2069,
2092, 2144
#6 BRKC The gravity shaft break control function is, not PRM2083
used (0) / used (1)
#7 SFCM The static friction compensation function is, not PRM
used (0) / used (1) 2071, 2072,
2073, 2347
02006 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#0 FCBL In a closed loop, backlash compensation is, PRM1851
reflected in the position (0) / not reflected in the
position (1)
02007 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#0 ESP2 The servo alarm two-axis simultaneous monitor
function is, not used (0) / used (1)
#1 IGNV When two seconds has elapsed after the servo
alarm two-axis simultaneous monitor function
holds the alarm state, the alarm state is, not reset
(0) / reset (1)
#7 FRCA Torque control is, not exercised (0) / exercised PRM2203#4
(1)
02008 Tandem control <Axis>
#1 TNDM Tandem control is, disabled (0) / enabled (1) Automatically
set by
parameter
(No. 1817#6)
#2 VFBA The feedrate feedback average function is, Main axis
disabled (0) / enabled (1) only
#7 LAXD Damping compensation is, valid for the sub-axis Main axis
only (0) / valid for both the main axis and only
sub-axis (1)
257
B-63947EN/01
258
7 PARAMETERS
02018 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#0 RVRSE The signal direction of the separate detector is,
not reversed (0) / reversed (1)
#1 MOVOBS The observer stop time disable function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#2 OVR8 The two-stage backlash acceleration override
format is, based on the 4096 standard (0) / based
on the 256 standard (1)
#7 PFBCPY The motor feedback signal for the main axis is, Sub-axis only
not shared by the sub-axis (0) / shared by the
sub-axis (1)
02019 Digital servo functions (option required) <Axis>
#1 TANDMP The tandem disturbance elimination control
function is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 LBUFEX The learning memory expansion function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#5 INVSYS The preview repetitive control function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#6 SLEN The learning control function is, not used (0) /
used (1)
#7 DPFB The dual feedback function is, not used (0) / used
(1)
02020 Motor ID number <Axis>
02021 Load inertia ratio <Axis>
02022 Motor rotation direction <Axis>
111: CW when viewed from the Pulsecoder
-111: CCW when viewed from the Pulsecoder
02023 Number of velocity pulses <Axis>
2000#0=0 2000#0=1
αi,βi Pulsecoder 8192 819
259
B-63947EN/01
260
7 PARAMETERS
02099 N-pulse suppression level <Axis>
PRM2003#4
02101 Overshoot compensation effective level <Axis>
02102 Final clamp value for actual current limit <Axis>,
No change is
required.
02103 Amount of track back upon detection of <Axis>
unexpected disturbance torque
02104 Unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm <Axis>
level
02105 Torque constant for Torque control <Axis>,
No change is
required.
02107 Override for velocity loop gain cutting <Axis>
02110 Magnetic saturation compensation <Axis>,
(base/coefficient) No change is
02111 Deceleration torque limit (base/coefficient) required.
02112 AMR conversion coefficient 1 <Axis>
02113 Resonance elimination filter 1: center frequency <Axis>
[Hz] PRM
2177, 2359
02114 Backlash acceleration function : acceleration <Axis>
amount override
02116 Unexpected disturbance torque detection: <Axis>
dynamic friction compensation value
02118 Excessive error level between semi-closed and <Axis>
closed loops PRM
2078, 2079
02119 Stop level with variable proportional gain <Axis>
02126 Tandem control , time constant for switching <Axis>
position feedback
02127 Non-interacting control coefficient <Axis>,
02128 Weak magnetic flux compensation (coefficient) No change is
02129 Weak magnetic flux compensation (base/limit) required.
02130 Smoothing compensation performed twice per <Axis>
pole pair
02131 Smoothing compensation performed four times <Axis>
per pole pair
02132 Smoothing compensation performed six times <Axis>
per pole pair
02133 Deceleration phase delay compensation <Axis>,
coefficient No change is
02134 Deceleration phase delay compensation required.
coefficient
02137 Stage 1 acceleration amount override for <Axis>
two-stage backlash acceleration
02138 AMR conversion coefficient 2 <Axis>
02139 AMR offset <Axis>
02142 Unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm <Axis>
level in rapid traverse
02144 Position feed forward coefficient for cutting <Axis>
[0.01%]
02145 Velocity feed forward coefficient for cutting [%] <Axis>
02146 End timer for two-stage backlash acceleration <Axis>
02156 Torque command filter (at rapid traverse) <Axis>
02161 OVC magnification at a stop <Axis>,
02162 2nd overload protection coefficient No change is
02163 2nd overload protection coefficient required.
02164 2nd overload protection coefficient
02165 Maximum amplifier current
02167 Stage 2 acceleration amount offset for two-stage <Axis>
backlash acceleration
261
B-63947EN/01
262
7 PARAMETERS
#4 HDIS At separate detector hardware disconnection
time, the stop distance reduction function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
02206 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#2 HBSF A backlash compensation amount and pitch error PRM
compensation are, selected with parameter (No. 2010#5,#4
2010) (0) / added simultaneously on both of the
closed loop side and semi-closed loop side (1)
02207 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#3 PK2D50 When the variable proportional gain function is PRM2016#3
used at stop time, the stop-time magnification is,
75% (0) / 50% (1)
02210 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#2 PK12S2 The current gain internally 4 times function is, not No change is
used (0) / used (1) required.
#5 ESPTM0 Emergency stop delay timer setting
#6 ESPTM1 ESPTM1 ESPTM0 Delay time PRM
0 0 50 ms 2005#6,2083
0 1 100 ms
1 0 200 ms
1 1 400 ms
02211 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#1 PHCP At deceleration time, the phase lag No change is
compensation function is, not used (0) / used (1) required.
02212 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#7 QVCK When the OVC or OVL alarm is issued, the quick
stop function is, not used (0) / used (1)
02213 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#7 MGPOS The pole position detection function is, not used
(0) / used (1)
02214 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#4 FFCHG The feed-forward function for each of cutting and
rapid traverse is, not used (0) / used (1)
#7 QVCK When the OVC or OVL alarm is issued, the quick
stop function is, not used (0) / used (1)
02215 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#2 TCPCLR At emergency stop time, the torque offset cancel
function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 ABT2 Unexpected disturbance torque detection Type-2
for each of cutting and rapid traverse is, not used
(0) / used (1)
02220 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#0 DECAMR For a synchronous built-in servo motor, the αiCZ PRM
768S sensor is, not used (0) / used (1) 2112,2138
02223 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#0 DISOBS The disturbance elimination filter function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#7 BLCUT2 The backlash acceleration function is enabled,
for both of cutting and rapid traverse (0) / for
cutting feed only (1)
02226 Digital servo functions <Axis>
(learning)
#0 QUCKST Learning control is started, with a command
specifying a nonzero value (0) / at the start of
G05 (1)
#6 PRFCLR In the compensation data mode, the learning
memory data is, preserved at an arbitrary time
(0) / cleared (1)
#7 MEMCLR The learning memory data is cleared, when
learning ends (1)/depending on ICM (0)
02227 Digital servo functions <Axis>
(learning)
#0 PARTLN The parts machining learning function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#1 ERRCHK Error monitoring is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
263
B-63947EN/01
264
7 PARAMETERS
#2 DD A DD motor is, not used (0) / used (1)
#7 CKLNOH Overheat detection via the PMC is, not used (0) /
used (1)
02318 Disturbance elimination filter: gain <Axis>
PRM2223#0
02319 Disturbance elimination filter: inertia ratio <Axis>
02320 Disturbance elimination filter: inverse function <Axis>
gain
02321 Disturbance elimination filter: time constant <Axis>
02322 Disturbance elimination filter: acceleration <Axis>
feedback limit
02323 Variable current PI rate <Axis>
PRM2203#2
02324 Variable proportional gain function in the stop <Axis>
state : arbitrary magnification at a stop PRM2016#3
02325 Tandem disturbance elimination control function: <Axis>
integral gain (main axis) PRM2019#1
Tandem disturbance elimination control function:
phase coefficient (sub-axis)
02326 Disturbance input : gain <Axis>
PRM2270#7
02327 Disturbance input: start frequency [Hz] <Axis>
02328 Disturbance input: end frequency [Hz] <Axis>
02329 Number of disturbance input measurement <Axis>
points
02333 Tandem disturbance elimination control function: <Axis>
incomplete integral time constant (main axis)
02334 Current loop gain magnification (enabled only <Axis>
during high-speed HRV current control) PRM
02335 Velocity loop gain magnification (enabled only 2013, 2014
during high-speed HRV current control)
02338 Backlash acceleration function: acceleration <Axis>
amount limit value
2-stage backlash acceleration function: stage-2
acceleration amount limit value
02339 2-stage backlash acceleration function: stage-2 <Axis>
acceleration amount (negative direction)
02340 Backlash acceleration function: acceleration <Axis>
amount override (negative direction)
Backlash acceleration function: Acceleration
amount override (negative direction)
02341 2-stage backlash acceleration function: stage-2 <Axis>
acceleration amount limit value (negative
direction)
2-stage backlash acceleration function: stage-2
acceleration amount limit value (negative
direction)
02345 Disturbance estimation function: dynamic friction <Axis>
compensation value in the stop state
02346 Disturbance estimation function: dynamic friction <Axis>
compensation limit value
02347 Static friction compensation amount (- direction) <Axis>
02352 Active resonance elimination filter: detection level <Axis>
PRM2270#3
02359 Resonance elimination filter 1: damping [%] <Axis>
PRM
2113, 2177
02360 Resonance elimination filter 2: attenuation center <Axis>
frequency [Hz]
02361 Resonance elimination filter 2: attenuation <Axis>
bandwidth [Hz]
02362 Resonance elimination filter 2: damping [%] <Axis>
02363 Resonance elimination filter 3: attenuation center <Axis>
frequency [Hz]
265
B-63947EN/01
266
7 PARAMETERS
02528 Dynamic characteristic compensation element <Axis>
(Gx) highest coefficient (learning)
02529 Dynamic characteristic compensation element
(Gx) lowest coefficient
02534 Shock reduction counter
02535 Manual thin-out count
02536 Deflection compensation amount
02537 Extended learning period
02543 Adaptive advanced preview control:
Application coefficient
02544 Adaptive advanced preview control:
Feed-forward coefficient 1
02545 Adaptive advanced preview control:
Feed-forward coefficient 2
02546 Adaptive advanced preview control:
Feed-forward coefficient 3
02547 Adaptive advanced preview control:
Feed-forward coefficient 4
02548 Adaptive advanced preview control:
Feed-forward coefficient 5
02549 Adaptive advanced preview control:
Feed-forward coefficient 6
02550 Error monitor level [detection unit]
02551 Error monitor start time [ms]
02552 Error monitor end time [ms]
7.2.11 DI/DO
03001 ST signal, High-speed MST interface, RRW signal
#1 SON Automatic operation is started, on the falling edge
("1"→"0") of the automatic operation start signal ST
(0) / on the rising edge ("0"→"1") of the automatic
operation start signal ST (1)
#2 RWM When the start of a program is being found in the
program memory, the rewind signal is, not output (0) /
output (1)
#7 MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M,
S, T, and B codes is, normal (0) / high-speed (1)
03002 Override polarity
#2 MFD When the high-speed M, S, T, or B interface is used,
and the block specifying the M code, S code, T code,
or B code includes neither a move command nor a
dwell command, the distribution completion signal
(DEN) and the strobe signal (MF, SF, TF, or BF) of
each function are, output with the distribution
completion signal lagging (0) / output at the same time
(1)
#4 IOV Override-related signal logic is used in such a way
that, negative logic signals are used based on
negative logic, and positive logic signals are used
based on positive logic (0) / logic is reversed (1)
#6 POV The dwell/auxiliary function time override function is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 OVM When the dwell/auxiliary function time override
function is used, override on M02 and M30 is, disabled
(0) / enabled (1)
03003 Interlock signals
#0 ITL The interlock signals for all axes are, valid (0) / invalid *IT
(1)
#2 ITX The interlock signal for each axis is, valid (0) / invalid IT1 - *IT8
(1)
#3 DIT The interlock signal for each axis direction is, valid (0)
/ invalid (1)
267
B-63947EN/01
268
7 PARAMETERS
03033 Allowable number of digits for the B code (2nd PRM
auxiliary function) 3450#0
269
B-63947EN/01
270
7 PARAMETERS
03117 Position coder
#1 SPP When a serial spindle is used, position coder signal
pulse data from the one-rotation signal is, not
displayed (0) / displayed (1), on the diagnostic screen
03119 Touch panel
#2 DDS The touch panel is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#3 TPA When the option for the external touch panel interface
is selected, the external touch panel interface
connection is, valid (0) / invalid (1)
03122 Time interval used to record time data in operation
history [min]
03123 Screen saver start time [min]
03124 Modal G code display
#0 D01 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
01 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#1 D02 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
02 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#2 D03 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
03 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#3 D04 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
04 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#4 D05 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
05 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#5 D06 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
06 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#6 D07 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
07 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#7 D08 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
08 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
03125 Modal G code display
#0 D09 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
09 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#1 D10 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
10 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#2 D11 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
11 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#3 D12 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
12 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#4 D13 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
13 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#5 D14 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
14 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#6 D15 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
15 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#7 D16 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
16 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
03126 Modal G code display
#0 D17 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
17 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#1 D18 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
18 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#2 D19 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
19 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#3 D20 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
20 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#4 D21 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
21 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#5 D22 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
22 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#6 D23 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
23 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#7 D24 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
24 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
271
B-63947EN/01
When 3160 = 0
System Type of indicator Type
When T Type of 12 horizontal Standard MDI unit for the lathe
series is soft keys system
used with Type of 7 horizontal Small MDI unit for the lathe system
path 1 soft keys
When M Type of 12 horizontal Standard MDI unit for the machining
series is soft keys center system
used with Type of 7 horizontal Small MDI unit for the machining
path 1 soft keys center system
272
7 PARAMETERS
03191 Data input
#2 WSI On the workpiece origin offset screen, the soft key
[INPUT] is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#3 SSF When data is input on the setting screen, the soft key
for confirming data input is, not displayed (0) /
displayed (1)
03192 Touch panel, Screen display
#1 T2P If two or more points are pressed on the touch panel, it
is assumed that, the gravity center position is pressed
(0) / the 1st pressed point is pressed (1)
#2 TRA If a point on the touch panel is held down for the time ALM
specified in parameter (No. 3197) or longer, no alarm SR5303
is issued (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
#7 PLD In the current position display field on the left side of T series
the single-path display screen, or on the program
check screen for simultaneous multi-path display, the
servo axis load meter and spindle load meter display
function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
03193 Program screen display
#4 ODR On the program directory screen, the unit of program
size is, KB (0) / page (512 bytes) (1)
03194 Diameter/radius programming
#2 DPA The absolute coordinates, relative coordinates, and
remaining move amount during diameter/radius
programming switching are displayed, according to
the specification during switching (0) / according to the
setting of parameter (No. 1006#3) (1)
#3 DPM The machine coordinates during diameter/radius
programming switching are displayed, according to
the setting of parameter (No. 1006#3) (0) / according
to the specification during switching (1)
03195 Operation history
#5 HKE A key operation history is, recorded (0) / not recorded
(1)
#6 HDE A DI/DO history is, recorded (0) / not recorded (1)
#7 EKE The soft key [CLEAR ALL] is, not displayed (0) /
displayed (1)
03196 History modification
#0 HTO A history of tool offset data modifications is, not
recorded (0) / recorded (1)
#1 HWO A history of workpiece offset data/extended workpiece
offset data/workpiece shift amount (T series)
modifications is, not recorded (0) / recorded (1)
#2 HPM A parameter modification history is, not recorded (0) /
recorded (1)
#3 HMV A custom macro common variable modification history
is, not recorded (0) / recorded (1)
#6 HOM A history of external operator messages is, recorded
(0) / not recorded (1)
#7 HAL When an alarm is issued, in the operation history and
alarm history, modal data, absolute coordinates, and
machine coordinates are, recorded (0) / not recorded
(1)
03197 Detection time of continuous pressing on the touch PRM
panel [sec] 3192#2
03201 Program registration
#1 RAL When programs are registered by I/O external device
control, all programs are registered (0) / only one
program is registered (1)
#2 REP When an attempt is made to reregister a program that
has an existing program number, an alarm is issued
(0) / the existing program is replaced with the new one
(1)
#5 N99 When an M99 block is specified, program registration PRM
is, terminated (0) / not terminated (1) 3201#6=0
273
B-63947EN/01
274
7 PARAMETERS
03222 Program protection range (minimum value) (PMIN) PRM
03223 Program protection range (maximum value) (PMAX) 3220,3221
03225 Key lock password for the parameters related to dual
check safety
03226 Key lock keyword for the parameters related to dual
check safety
03227 Machine menu data number selection (horizontal soft
key)
03228 Machine menu data number selection (vertical soft
key)
03233 Program editing
#0 PCE Program editing is performed, in the word editing
mode (0) / in the character editing mode (1)
#1 PDM When the program directory screen displays a list of
programs stored in the CNC file management format
on the data server, the data server mode is selected
(0) / the CNC management format mode is selected
(1)
03241 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode AICC1
(1st character)
03242 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode
(2nd character)
03243 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode
(3rd character)
03244 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode
(4th character)
03245 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode
(5th character)
03246 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode
(6th character)
03247 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode
(7th character)
03251 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode AICC2
(1st character)
03252 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode
(2nd character)
03253 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode
(3rd character)
03254 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode
(4th character)
03255 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode
(5th character)
03256 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode
(6th character)
03257 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode
(7th character)
03280 Display language
#0 NLC Dynamic display language switching is, enabled (0) / PRM3281
disabled (1)
03281 Display language
03290 Protection of data input
#0 WOF Input of a tool wear offset data with MDI keys is, not PRM
inhibited (0) / inhibited (1) 3294,3295
#1 GOF Input of a tool geometry offset value with MDI keys is, PRM
not inhibited (0) / inhibited (1) 3294,3295
#2 MCV Input of a macro variable with MDI keys is, not
inhibited (0) / inhibited (1)
#3 WZO Input of a workpiece origin offset or workpiece
coordinate system shift amount (T series) with MDI
keys is, not inhibited (0) / inhibited (1)
#4 IWZ Input of a workpiece origin offset or workpiece
coordinate system shift amount with MDI keys in the
automatic operation halt state is, not inhibited (0) /
inhibited (1)
275
B-63947EN/01
#5 GO2 Input of a 2nd geometry tool offset value with MDI T series
keys is, inhibited (0) / not inhibited (1)
#6 MCM Macro variable input with the MDI keys is, enabled
regardless of which mode is set (0) / enabled in the
MDI mode only (1)
#7 KEY For memory protection keys, the KEY1 to KEY4
signals are used (0) / only the KEY1 signal is used (1)
03291 Protection of data input
#0 WPT A tool wear offset value is input, by using the KEY1
signal (0) / by not using the KEY1 signal (1)
03294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI PRM
is disabled 3290#0
03295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) 3290#1
whose input by MDI is disabled
03301 Screen hard copy
#0 H16 The bit map data of a screen hard copy is based on,
256 colors (0) / 16 colors (1)
7
#7 HDC The screen hard copy function is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
03321 Screen number assigned to the 1st vertical soft key
03322 Screen number assigned to the 2nd vertical soft key
03323 Screen number assigned to the 3rd vertical soft key
03324 Screen number assigned to the 4th vertical soft key
03325 Screen number assigned to the 5th vertical soft key
03326 Screen number assigned to the 6th vertical soft key
03327 Screen number assigned to the 7th vertical soft key
03328 Screen number assigned to the 8th vertical soft key
03329 Screen number assigned to the 9th vertical soft key
03330 Screen number assigned to the 10th vertical soft key
03331 Screen number assigned to the 11th vertical soft key
03332 Screen number assigned to the 12th vertical soft key
03333 Screen number assigned to the 13th vertical soft key
03334 Screen number assigned to the 14th vertical soft key
03335 Screen number assigned to the 15th vertical soft key
03336 Screen number assigned to the 16th vertical soft key
7.2.13 Programs
03400 Auxiliary functions, Positioning
#0 MGO If the program restart M/S/T/B code output function is PRM
used, an M code is output according to a combination 7300#7=1
with parameter MOA (No. 7300#6).
MGO MOA Meaning
0 0 The last M code is output.
0 1 M codes are output in specification order.
1 0 The last M code of each group is output.
1 1 M codes are output in group order.
#1 MGC When a single block specifies multiple M commands, PRM
an M code group check is, made (0) / not made (1) 3441-3444
#5 PGD Programmable diameter/radius programming
switching (G10.9) is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#6 SMX An S code specified in a block that specifies G92 (G
code system A: G50 (T series)) is, regarded as a
maximum spindle speed command (0) / regarded as a
spindle speed command (1)
03401 G code, Calculator-type input
#0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted, the least input
increment is assumed (0) / the unit of mm, inches, or
sec is assumed (1)
#4 MAB In MDI operation, switching between the absolute and GSB,GSC
incremental commands is performed, by G90 or G91
(0) / according to parameter (No. 3401#5) (1)
#5 ABS In MDI mode, a move command is assumed, as an GSB,GSC
incremental command (0) / as an absolute command PRM
(1) 3401#4=1
276
7 PARAMETERS
#6 GSB The G code system of a lathe is A/B/C type. T series
#7 GSC GSC GSB G code system
0 0 G code system A
0 1 G code system B
1 0 G code system C
03402 G code in the initial state
#0 G01 At power-on time or in the cleared state, the mode is,
G00 (0) / G01 (1)
#1 G18 At power-on time or in the cleared state, the mode is, M series
G17 (0) / G18 (1)
#2 G19 At power-on time or in the cleared state, the mode, M series
follows the setting of parameter (No. 3402#1) (0) / is
G19 (1)
#3 G91 At power-on time or in the cleared state, the mode is,
G90 (0) / G91 (1)
#4 FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state, feed per T series
revolution is set (0) / feed per minute is set (1)
#5 G70 The commands for inch input and metric input are, M series
G20 and G21 (0) / G70 and G71 (1)
#6 CLR The “RESET” key, external reset signal, RRW signal,
and emergency stop signal cause, the reset state (0) /
the cleared state (1)
#7 G23 When the power is turned on, G22 is set (0) / G23 is
set (1)
03403 Circular interpolation
#5 CIR When none of R, I, J, and K is specified in circular ALM
interpolation or helical interpolation, a movement is PS0022
made by linear interpolation (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
03404 M functions
#0 NOB In program execution, a block consisting of only O,
EOB, and N is, not ignored (0) / ignored (1)
#2 SBP P in M198 specifies, a file number (0) / a program
number (1)
#4 M30 When M30 is read, the cursor returns to the start of
the program (0) / does not return to the start of the
program (1)
#5 M02 When M02 is read, the cursor returns to the start of
the program (0) / does not return to the start of the
program (1)
#7 M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one
block is, one (0) / up to three (1)
03405 Dwell, Calculator-type input, Direct drawing dimension
programming
#0 AUX As the command unit of the 2nd auxiliary function
specified with a decimal point, the same unit is used
for metric input and inch input (0) / the unit for metric
input is multiplied by 10 for inch input (1)
#1 DWL Dwell operation is based on, dwell per second at all
times (0) / dwell per second (G94) or dwell per rotation
(G95) (1)
#3 G36 As G codes for automatic tool compensation, G36 and T series
G37 are used (0) / G37.1 and G37.2 are used (1)
#4 CCR For chamfering, addresses "I", "J", and "K" are used, T series
and ",R", ", C", and ",A" are used in direct drawing
dimension programming (0) / address "C" is used, and
"R", "C", and "A" are used in direct drawing dimension
programming (1)
#5 DDP For angle commands in direct drawing dimension T series
programming, normal specification is used (0) / a
supplementary angle is given (1)
03406 G code clearing
#1 C01 Upon reset, the G codes in group 01 are, cleared (0) / PRM
not cleared (1) 3402#6=1
#2 C02 Upon reset, the G codes in group 02 are, cleared (0) /
not cleared (1)
277
B-63947EN/01
278
7 PARAMETERS
03415 M code 5 preventing buffering
03416 M code 6 preventing buffering
03417 M code 7 preventing buffering
03418 M code 8 preventing buffering
03419 M code 9 preventing buffering
03420 M code 10 preventing buffering
03421 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (lower limit)
03422 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (upper limit)
03423 Range specification 2 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (lower limit)
03424 Range specification 2 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (upper limit)
03425 Range specification 3 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (lower limit)
03426 Range specification 3 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (upper limit)
03427 Range specification 4 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (lower limit)
03428 Range specification 4 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (upper limit)
03429 Range specification 5 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (lower limit)
03430 Range specification 5 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (upper limit)
03431 Range specification 6 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (lower limit)
03432 Range specification 6 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (upper limit)
03436 Range specification 1 of 2nd auxiliary function codes
that do not perform buffering (lower limit)
03437 Range specification 1 of 2nd auxiliary function codes
that do not perform buffering (upper limit)
03438 Range specification 2 of 2nd auxiliary function codes
that do not perform buffering (lower limit)
03439 Range specification 2 of 2nd auxiliary function codes
that do not perform buffering (upper limit)
03441 Start number of M codes for which an M code group
can be set (1)
03442 Start number of M codes for which an M code group
can be set (2)
03443 Start number of M codes for which an M code group
can be set (3)
03444 Start number of M codes for which an M code group
can be set (4)
03450 2nd auxiliary function command
#0 AUP A 2nd auxiliary function command specified in the
calculator-type decimal point input format, specified
with a decimal point, or specified with a negative value
is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 BDX When ASCII code is called using the same address as PRM3460
for the 2nd auxiliary function, a combination of
parameter (No. 3450#0) set to 1 with an option
selection, changes the argument unit (0) / does not
change the argument unit (1)
03451 Thread cutting, Local coordinate system
#0 GQS The threading start angle shift function (Q) is, disabled M series
(0) / enabled (1)
#4 NBN When parameter (No. 3404#0) is set to 1, a block
consisting of a sequence number only is, ignored (0) /
not ignored (1)
279
B-63947EN/01
280
7 PARAMETERS
03620 Number of the pitch error compensation position for <Axis>
the reference position for each axis
03621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at <Axis>
extremely negative position for each axis
03622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at <Axis>
extremely positive position for each axis
03623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each <Axis>
axis
03624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions <Axis>
for each axis [Increment system]
03625 Travel distance per revolution in pitch error <Axis>
compensation of rotary axis type [Detection unit] PRM
Travel distance per revolution 1006#0,#1
= compensation value × compensation interval
03626 Number of the bi-directional pitch error compensation <Axis>
position at extremely negative position (for movement PRM3621
in the negative direction)
03627 Pitch error compensation at reference position when a <Axis>
movement to the reference position is made from the PRM
direction opposite to the direction of reference position 1006#5
return
03661 Number of a pitch error compensation position for the PRM
reference position for each slave axis when 3601#1
independent pitch error compensation is performed
under simple spindle synchronous control
03666 Number of the pitch error compensation position at PRM
extremely negative position for each slave axis when 3601#1
independent pitch error compensation is performed
under simple spindle synchronous control
03671 Number of the pitch error compensation position at PRM
extremely positive position for each slave axis when 3601#1
independent pitch error compensation is performed
under simple spindle synchronous control
03676 Number of the pitch error compensation position at PRM
extremely negative position for each slave axis when 3601#1
independent bi-directional pitch error compensation is
performed under simple spindle synchronous control
03681 Pitch error compensation value at the reference PRM
position when a movement is made to the reference 1006#5
position in the direction opposite to the reference 3601#1
position return direction for each slave axis in the case
where independent bi-directional pitch error
compensation is performed under simple spindle
synchronous control
281
B-63947EN/01
282
7 PARAMETERS
#1 SAT Check of the spindle speed arrival signal at the start of T series
executing the thread cutting block is, performed
according to the setting of SAR (0) / performed at all
times (1)
#5 SOC During constant surface speed control, the maximum PRM3772
spindle speed clamp command clamps the spindle,
before spindle speed override (0) / after spindle speed
override (1)
#6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle, the spindle G30#0 - #7
override is, disabled (tied to 100%) (0) / enabled (1)
03709 Spindle speed, Multi-spindle
#0 SAM The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle Usually, 0
speed is, 4 (0) / 1 (1)
#1 RSC In the constant surface speed control mode, the
surface speed of a rapid traverse block is calculated,
in accordance with the coordinates of the end point (0)
/ in accordance with the current value, as in cutting
feed (1)
#2 MSI In multi-spindle control, the SIND signal is valid, only
when the 1st spindle is selected (0) / for each spindle
(1)
#3 MRS When the actual spindle speed signals and S 12-bit
code signals are output in multi-spindle control, the
signals common to the 1st spindle and 2nd spindles
are used (0) / separate signals are used (1)
03712
#2 CSF The coordinate system establishment function based PRM
on Cs contour control is, disabled (0) / enabled (1) 4353#5
03713 Multi-spindle
#3 MSC Multi-spindle control type C is, used (0) / not used (1) PRM
3709#2=1
#4 EOV Each spindle override signal is, not used (0) / used (1) PRM
3713#3=1
#5 MSP The spindle control M/S/P format is, invalid (0) / valid PRM
(1) 3703#3=1
3713#3=1
#6 MPC In accordance with a selected spindle, the position PRM
coder feedback signal to be used for threading, feed 3713#3=1
per minute, and so forth is, not automatically switched
(0) / automatically switched (1)
03715 Spindle speed arrival signal <Axis>
#0 NSA When a move command is executed for an axis, the
spindle speed arrival signal for the axis is, checked (0)
/ not checked (1)
03716 Type of spindle motor
#0 A/S The type of spindle motor is, analog (0) / serial (1) PRM
1000#0
03717 Motor number to each spindle
03718 Subscript for display of a serial spindle (main spindle) PRM
03719 Subscript for display of a serial spindle (sub spindle) 1000#0
03720 Number of position coder pulses [Detection unit]
03721 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side
03722 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side
03729 Cs contour control, Spindle orientation
#0 ORT The spindle orientation function of stop position
external setting type based on the position coder is,
not used (0) / used (1)
#1 FPR With each spindle, feed per revolution (without a
position coder) is, not used (0) / used (1)
#2 CSN When the Cs contour control mode is off, in-position
check is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#3 NCS When the Cs contour control mode is on, the
completion of mode switching, waits for spindle
activation to be turned on (0) / does not wait for
spindle activation to be turned on (1)
283
B-63947EN/01
03730 Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output
of spindle speed [0.1%]
10(V)
Set value = × 1000
Measured voltage (V)
03731 Compensation value for the offset voltage of spindle
speed analog output [V]
- 8191× Offset voltage (V)
Set value =
12.5
03732 The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the PRM
spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift 3705#0
Set value =
Spindle speed during spindle gear shift
×n
4020
Maximum spindle motor speed
Serial spindle: n=16383
Analog spindle: n=4095
03735 Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor M series
Minimum clamp speed of spindle motor
Set value = × 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed 7
03736 Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor M series
Maximum clamp speed of spindle motor
Set value = × 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed
03738 Spindle name 2 of each spindle PRM
03739 Spindle name 3 of each spindle 1000#0
3703#3
3798#1
3706#4
03740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed
arrival signal [ms]
03741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 [min-1]
03742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 [min-1]
03743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 [min-1]
03744 Maximum spindle speed for gear 4 [min-1]
03751 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to M series
gear 2 PRM
03752 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to 3705#2
gear 3
Setting value =(Spindle motor speed when the gears
are switched / Maximum spindle motor speed) × 4095
03761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 M series
during tapping [min-1] PRM
03762 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 3705#3=1
during tapping [min-1]
03770 Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface
speed control
03771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed
control mode (G96) [min-1]
03772 Maximum spindle speed for each spindle [min-1]
03775 Default P command value for spindle selection in PRM
multi-spindle control 3703#3=1
3706#2=1
03781 P code for selecting the spindle in multi-spindle control PRM
3703#3=1
03796 Spindle switching group number
03797 Dual Check Safety function
#0 DCN With the dual check safety function, each target
spindle is, checked (0) / not checked (1)
284
7 PARAMETERS
03798 Spindle alarm, Spindle speed command
#0 ALM The spindle alarm for all spindles is, enabled (0) /
ignored (1)
#1 ESN Programmed spindle command PRM
3798#1 3703#3 Selection method 1000#0
0 0 Signal selection 3738, 3739
0 1 P command
1 0 Signal selection
1 1 Spindle name
#6 SSW The spindle switch function is, not performed (0) /
performed (1)
03799 Spindle function check
#0 NAL An alarm detected on the spindle amplifier side is, PRM
displayed (0) / not displayed (1) 3798#0
#1 NDP When an analog spindle is used, a position coder PRM
disconnection check is, made (0) / not made (1) 3716#0
3799#0
#2 ASD When a serial spindle is used, a spindle speed is
calculated based on, feedback pulses from the
position coder (0) / speed monitor (1)
#3 SVP As synchronization errors displayed on the spindle
screen, monitor values are displayed (0) / peak-hold
values are displayed (1)
#4 NCA A spindle analog output voltage is, checked (0) / not
checked (1)
#5 SSH Display of all spindle speed data on the diagnostic
screen is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
03841 Servo motor spindle control number PRM
2016#4
03842 Maximum speed under servo motor spindle control [Input unit]
03843 Acceleration/deceleration time constant under servo motor
spindle control [ms]
03844 Master spindle number
03900 Servo axis number used for interpolation with a Cs contour
control axis (1st group)
03901 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (High gear) (1st group) [0.01/sec]
03902 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Medium High gear) (1st group) [0.01/sec]
03903 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Medium Low gear) (1st group) [0.01/sec]
03904 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Low gear) (1st group) [0.01/sec]
03910 Servo axis number used for interpolation with a Cs contour
control axis (2nd group)
03911 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (High gear) (2nd group) [0.01/sec]
03912 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Medium High gear) (2nd group) [0.01/sec]
03913 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Medium Low gear) (2nd group) [0.01/sec]
03914 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Low gear) (2nd group) [0.01/sec]
03920 Servo axis number used for interpolation with a Cs contour
control axis (3rd group)
03921 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (High gear) (3rd group) [0.01/sec]
03922 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Medium High gear) (3rd group) [0.01/sec]
03923 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Medium Low gear) (3rd group) [0.01/sec]
03924 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Low gear) (3rd group) [0.01/sec]
03930 Servo axis number used for interpolation with a Cs contour
control axis (4th group)
285
B-63947EN/01
03931 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (High gear) (4th group) [0.01/sec]
03932 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Medium High gear) (4th group) [0.01/sec]
03933 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Medium Low gear) (4th group) [0.01/sec]
03934 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Low gear) (4th group) [0.01/sec]
03940 Servo axis number used for interpolation with a Cs contour
control axis (5th group)
03941 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (High gear) (5th group) [0.01/sec]
03942 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Medium High gear) (5th group) [0.01/sec]
03943 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (Medium Low gear) (5th group) [0.01/sec]
03944 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs 7
contour control axis (Low gear) (5th group) [0.01/sec]
286
7 PARAMETERS
04003 Spindle sensor, Orientation
#0 PCMGSL The system of orientation is, position coder system (0) /
magnetic sensor system (1)
#2 DIRCT1 Rotation direction at spindle orientation
#3 DIRCT2 DIRCT2 DIRCT1 Rotation direction
Direction of rotation immediately before
0 0
(Counterclockwise for the 1st time after power-on)
Direction of rotation immediately before
0 1
(Clockwise for the 1st time after power-on)
1 0 Counterclockwise when viewed from the motor shaft
1 1 Clockwise when viewed from the motor shaft
287
B-63947EN/01
#4 LDTOUT During acc./dec., the load detection signal is, not output (0) /
output (1)
#6 OVRTYP The type of analog override is, linear function type (0) /
quadratic function type (1)
04010 Type of motor sensor
#0 MSTYP0 Type of motor sensor
#1 MSTYP1 MSTYP2 MSTYP1 MSTYP0 Type of motor sensor
#2 MSTYP2 0 0 0 αiM sensor
0 0 1 αiMZ, αiBZ, αiCZ sensor
288
7 PARAMETERS
04016 Cs contour control
#3 FFSMTH The feed-forward smoothing function is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#4 IDLPTN Induction (HRV): Usually (0) / when a value less than 100 is
set as the motor voltage (No. 4086) in Cs contour control or
as the motor voltage (No. 4085) in the servo mode (1)
- Synchronous (HRV): Not used
#5 RFCHK1 The alarms (82, 83, 85, 86) related position feedback (in the
Cs contour control mode) are, not detected (0) / detected (1)
#6 RFCHK2 The alarm (46) related to threading position detection signal
feedback is, not detected (0) / detected (1)
#7 RFCHK3 The function for detecting the one-rotation signal again before
the position control mode is entered is, disabled (0) / enabled
(1)
04017 Orientation, Differential speed control
#0 VINTDC Induction (HRV): Setting of an integral time constant
operation in differential speed control (1)
#7 NRROEN When a command for orientation from the stop state is
specified, the shortcut function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
04018 High-speed orientation
#5 HSVCM High-speed orientation speed command compensation is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#6 HSORI The high-speed orientation function is, disabled (0) / enabled
(1)
04019 Speed clamp, Automatic parameter setting function
#2 SSTTRQ When the speed is 0, speed clamping is, enabled (0) /
disabled (1)
#4 SDTCHG In switching from high speed to low speed at output switching
time, the function for switching based on the speed detection
signal SDT set to 1 is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 PRLOAD Automatic parameter setting is, not performed (0) / performed
(1)
04020 Maximum motor speed [min-1]
04021 Maximum speed on Cs contour control mode [min-1]
04022 Speed arrival detection level [0.1%]
04023 Speed detection level [0.1%]
04024 Zero speed detection level [0.01%]
04025 Limited torque [%]
04026 Load detection level 1 [%]
04027 Load detection level 2 [%]
04028 Limited output pattern
04029 Output limit [%]
04030 Soft start/stop time [min-1/s]
04031 Stop position of position coder method orientation
04032 Acceleration on spindle synchronous control [min-1/s]
04033 Spindle synchronous speed arrival level [min-1]
04034 Shift during synchronous control of spindle phase
04035 Compensation data for spindle phase synchronous control
04036 Feed-forward coefficient [%]
04037 Feed-forward coefficient of velocity loop
04038 Spindle orientation speed [min-1]
04039 Induction (HRV): Slip compensation gain
Synchronous (HRV): Not used
04040 Velocity loop proportional gain on velocity control mode(High)
04041 Velocity loop proportional gain on velocity control mode (Low)
04042 Velocity loop proportional gain on orientation (High)
04043 Velocity loop proportional gain on orientation (Low)
04044 Velocity loop proportional gain on servo mode/spindle
synchronous control (High)
289
B-63947EN/01
290
7 PARAMETERS
04084 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on orientation
Synchronous (HRV): AMR offset
04085 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on servo mode/spindle
synchronous control mode
Synchronous (HRV): Fine AMR offset tuning
04086 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on Cs contour control
Synchronous (HRV): Inductance ratio
04087 Overspeed level [%]
04088 Level for detecting excess velocity error when motor is
restrained [0.01%]
04089 Level for detecting excess velocity error when motor rotates
[0.1%]
04090 Overload detection level [%]
04091 Rate of change in position gain during reference position
return on servo mode [%]
04092 Rate of change in position gain during reference position
return on Cs contour control [%]
04093 Value displayed on load meter at maximum output
04094 Acceleration feedback gain
04095 Adjusted output voltage of speedometer [0.1%]
04096 Adjusted output voltage of load meter [0.1%]
04097 Feedback gain of spindle speed
04098 Maximum speed for position feedback signal detection [min-1]
04099 Delay time for motor excitation [ms]
04100 Induction (HRV): Base speed of motor output specifications
Synchronous (HRV): Base speed of motor output
specifications
04101 Induction (HRV): Output limit for motor output specifications
Synchronous (HRV): Output limit for motor output
specifications
04102 Induction (HRV): Excitation voltage saturation speed at
no-load
Synchronous (HRV): q-phase current limit start speed
04103 Induction (HRV): Base speed limit ratio
Synchronous (HRV): d-phase current command start speed
(magnetic field weakening start speed)
04104 Induction (HRV): Current loop proportional gain
Synchronous (HRV): Current loop proportional gain
04106 Induction (HRV): Current loop integral gain
Synchronous (HRV): Current loop integral gain
04108 Induction (HRV): Velocity at which the current loop integral
gain is zero
Synchronous (HRV): Velocity at which the current loop
integral gain is zero
04109 Induction (HRV): Filter time constant for processing saturation
related to the voltage command
Synchronous (HRV): Filter time constant for processing
saturation related to the voltage command
04110 Induction (HRV): Current conversion constant
Synchronous (HRV): Current conversion constant
04111 Induction (HRV): Secondary current coefficient
Synchronous (HRV): Maximum current coefficient
04112 Induction (HRV): Criterion level for saturation related to the
voltage command/PWM command clamp value
Synchronous (HRV): Criterion level for saturation related to
the voltage command/PWM command clamp value
04113 Induction (HRV): Slip constant
Synchronous (HRV): Current coefficient for magnetic flux
weakening
04114 Induction (HRV): Slip compensation coefficient for a
high-speed zone/slip compensation coefficient at deceleration
Synchronous (HRV): Not used
291
B-63947EN/01
292
7 PARAMETERS
04148 Induction (HRV): Criterion level for saturation related to the
voltage command/PWM command clamp value
04149 Induction (HRV): Slip constant
04150 Induction (HRV): Slip compensation coefficient for a
high-speed zone/slip compensation coefficient at deceleration
04151 Induction (HRV): PWM command clamp value at deceleration
04152 Induction (HRV): Motor leakage constant
04153 Induction (HRV): Regular-time voltage compensation
coefficient for high-speed zone/regular-time motor voltage
coefficient
04154 Induction (HRV): Acceleration-time voltage compensation
coefficient for high-speed zone/acceleration-time motor
voltage coefficient
04155 Induction (HRV): Reserved
04156 Induction (HRV): Slip compensation gain
04157 Time constant for changing the torque (TCMD filter time
constant) [0.5ms]
04158 Induction (HRV): maximum torque curve compensation
coefficient
04159 Induction (HRV): Secondary current coefficient for rigid
tapping
04160 Hysteresis of speed detection level [min-1]
04161 Induction (HRV): Current loop proportional gain speed
coefficient/current phase delay compensation coefficient
04162 Integral gain of velocity loop during cutting feed on Cs contour
control mode (High)
04163 Integral gain of velocity loop during cutting feed on Cs contour
control mode (Low)
04165 Induction (HRV): Excitation current change time constant
04166 Induction (HRV): Regenerative power limit for high-speed
zone/regenerative power limit
04168 Current overload alarm detection level
04169 Temperature monitoring time constant
04170 Current overload alarm detection level
04171 Denominator of arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and
spindle (High)
04172 Numerator of arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and
spindle (High)
04173 Denominator of arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and
spindle (Low)
04174 Numerator of arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and
spindle (Low)
04176 Setting of rotation direction
#0 ROTA1 The spindle and spindle motor rotate, in the same
direction (0) / in the opposite directions (1)
#4 RETSV In the servo mode, the direction of reference position When
return is, counterclockwise (0) / clockwise (1) viewed from
the spindle
04177 Magnetic sensor, Spindle sensor, MRDY signal
#0 MRDY1 The MRDY signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 MGDIR The magnetic sensor and spindle motor rotate, in the
opposite directions (0) / in the same direction (1)
#4 SSDIRC The spindle sensor and spindle motor rotate, in the same
direction (0) / in the opposite directions (1)
293
B-63947EN/01
294
7 PARAMETERS
04186 Motor sensor type
#0 MSTYP0 Motor sensor type
#1 MSTYP1 MSTYP2 MSTYP1 MSTYP0 Spindle sensor type
#2 MSTYP2 0 0 0 αiM sensor
0 0 1 αiMZ, αiBZ, αiCZ sensor
295
B-63947EN/01
296
7 PARAMETERS
04230 MS signal gain adjustment
04231 Induction (HRV)(H): Regenerative power limit for high-speed
zone/regenerative power limit
04232 Delay time until motor power is cut off [10ms]
04233 Setting of acc./dec. time [s]
04234 Spindle load monitor observer gain 1
04235 Spindle load monitor observer gain 2
04236 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on velocity control mode
04237 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on orientation
04238 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on servo mode
04239 Rate of change in position gain during reference position
return on servo mode [%]
04240 Feed-forward coefficient [%]
04241 Feed-forward coefficient of velocity loop
04243 Denominator of arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and
spindle (High)
04244 Numerator of arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and
spindle (High)
04245 Denominator of arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and
spindle (Low)
04246 Numerator of arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and
spindle (Low)
04248 Spindle load monitor torque constant
04249 Spindle load monitor observer gain 1
04250 Spindle load monitor observer gain 2
04254 Induction (HRV): Slip compensation gain
04255 Induction (HRV): Slip compensation gain
04256 Induction (HRV): Base speed of motor output specifications
04257 Induction (HRV): Output limit for motor output specifications
04258 Induction (HRV): Excitation voltage saturation speed at
no-load
04259 Induction (HRV): Base speed limit ratio
04260 Induction (HRV): Current loop proportional gain
04261 Induction (HRV): Current loop integral gain
04262 Induction (HRV): Velocity at which the current loop integral
gain is zero
04263 Induction (HRV): Filter time constant for processing saturation
related to the voltage command
04264 Induction (HRV): Current conversion constant
04265 Induction (HRV): Secondary current coefficient
04266 Induction (HRV): Criterion level for saturation related to the
voltage command/PWM command clamp value
04267 Induction (HRV): Slip constant
04268 Induction (HRV): Slip compensation coefficient for a
high-speed zone/slip compensation coefficient at deceleration
04269 Induction (HRV): PWM command clamp value at deceleration
04270 Induction (HRV): Motor leakage constant
04271 Induction (HRV): Regular-time voltage compensation
coefficient for high-speed zone/regular-time motor voltage
coefficient
04272 Induction (HRV): Acceleration-time voltage compensation
coefficient for high-speed zone/acceleration-time motor
voltage coefficient
04273 Time constant for changing the torque (TCMD filter time
constant) [0.5ms]
04274 Value displayed on load meter at maximum output
04275 Induction (HRV): Maximum torque curve compensation
coefficient
297
B-63947EN/01
298
7 PARAMETERS
04323 Motor acceleration at deceleration time (Low) [10min-1/s]
04324 Motor acceleration at deceleration time (High) [10min-1/s]
04325 Motor acceleration at deceleration time (Low) [10min-1/s]
04326 Acceleration limitation start speed at deceleration time (High)
[min-1]
04327 Acceleration limitation start speed at deceleration time (High)
[min-1]
04328 Command multiplication for spindle orientation by position
coder
04329 Command multiplication for spindle orientation by position
coder
04330 Acceleration limitation start speed at deceleration time (Low)
[min-1]
04331 Acceleration limitation start speed at deceleration time (Low)
[min-1]
04332 Induction (HRV): Not used
04333 Induction (HRV): Not used
04334 Number of motor sensor arbitrary teeth
04335 Number of motor sensor arbitrary teeth
04336 Switching point used for an acc./dec. time constant used for
spindle synchronous control [min-1]
04340 Bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant during spindle
synchronous control [ms]
04341 Unexpected disturbance torque detection level [0.01%]
04344 Advanced preview feed-forward coefficient [0.01%]
04345 Serial spindle motor detection speed
04346 Incomplete integration factor
04347 Master-slave speed difference state signal output setting
[min-1]
04348 Current overload alarm detection level
04349 Temperature monitoring time constant
04350 Current overload alarm detection level
04351 Current detection offset compensation
04352 Valid feed-forward range, EGB
#1 PKHALW The load meter output peak hold
function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 FFALWS Feed-forward is enabled, only in
cutting feed (0) / at all times (1)
#6 SLAVE Spindle-amplifier communication is, Tandem slave axis
disabled (0) / slave axis (1) specification when
parameter (No. 4015#3) is
set to 1
#7 MASTER Spindle-amplifier communication is, Tandem master specification
disabled (0) / master axis (1) when parameter (No.
4015#3) is set to 1
04353 Tandem control
#1 VFBAV For the velocity feedback signal in
the torque tandem mode, only the
motor speed on the master side is
used (0) / the average speed of the
master and slave is used (1)
#2 RVSVC2 In the torque tandem mode, the Functions in combination
master motor and slave motor with parameter (No.
rotate, in the same direction (0) / in 4009#1).
the opposite directions (1)
#5 CSPTRE The position data transfer function
for Cs origin establishment is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
04354 Excessive semi-closed loop/closed loop position error alarm
(alarm 61) detection level
04355 Motor sensor signal amplitude ratio compensation
299
B-63947EN/01
300
7 PARAMETERS
04412 Disturbance input function: measurement frequency interval
[Hz]
04413 Disturbance input function: number of measurements per
frequency
04414 Disturbance input function: disturbance torque command
amplitude [%]
04415 Disturbance input function: motor speed command for
measurement [min-1]
04416 Resonance elimination filter 2: attenuation center frequency
[Hz]
04417 Resonance elimination filter 2: attenuation bandwidth [Hz]
04418 Resonance elimination filter 2: damping [%]
04419 Resonance elimination filter 3: attenuation center frequency
[Hz]
04420 Resonance elimination filter 3: attenuation bandwidth [Hz]
04421 Resonance elimination filter 3: damping [%]
04422 Resonance elimination filter 4: attenuation center frequency
[Hz]
04423 Resonance elimination filter 4: attenuation bandwidth [Hz]
04424 Resonance elimination filter 4: damping [%]
04438 Safety limit speed 2 for each spindle [min-1]
04440 Safety limit speed 3 for each spindle [min-1]
04442 Safety limit speed 4 for each spindle [min-1]
04443 Feed-forward coefficient of velocity loop
04448 Spindle stop judgment level [min-1]
04449 Direction detection current/polarity determination current for
automatic mode pole position detection
04450 Allowable travel distance magnification/velocity feedback
threshold for automatic mode pole position detection
04467
#2 ZPHDTC Setting of the detection lower limit of the one-rotation signal
#5 A21DEN Whether to detect the alarm (alarm 21) related to spindle
sensor polarity erroneous setting
04468
#6 DTQTRG Triggering of the disturbance input function (vibration
application function)
#7 DTQFNC Setting of the disturbance input function (vibration application
function)
04481 Feed-forward timing adjustment coefficient
04486 Feed-forward coefficient of velocity loop
04498 Spindle EGB master side: denominator of arbitrary gear ratio
between motor sensor and spindle
04499 Spindle EGB master side: numerator of arbitrary gear ratio
between motor sensor and spindle
04500 Denominator of arbitrary gear ratio between spindle sensor
and spindle (High)
04501 Numerator of arbitrary gear ratio between spindle sensor and
spindle (High)
04502 Denominator of arbitrary gear ratio between spindle sensor
and spindle (Low)
04503 Numerator of arbitrary gear ratio between spindle sensor and
spindle (Low)
04508 Rate of change in acceleration at soft start/stop [min-1/s2]
04515 Excessive speed deviation alarm detection level on spindle
synchronous control [min-1]
04516 Excessive positional deviation alarm detection level on
spindle synchronous control
04520 Primary delay time constant in dual position feedback
[for servo mode]
301
B-63947EN/01
302
7 PARAMETERS
#5 TRV The rotation direction of spindle positioning is, not
reversed (0) / reversed (1)
#6 ESI The unit of rapid traverse rate on the spindle positioning
axis is, not increased by a factor of 10 (0) / increased by
a factor of 10 (1)
#7 IMB Half-fixed angle positioning based on M codes uses,
specification A (0) / specification B (1)
04959 Spindle positioning <Axis>
#0 DMD A machine coordinate on the spindle positioning axis is PRM
displayed in, degrees (0) / pulses (1) 4950#0=1
04960 M code specifying the spindle orientation
04961 M code releasing the spindle positioning mode
04962 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle PRM
4963,4964
04963 Basic angle for half-fixed angle positioning [deg]
04964 Number of M codes for specifying a spindle positioning PRM4962
angle
04970 Position gain
04971 Position gain multiplier (1st stage)
04972 Position gain multiplier (2nd stage)
04973 Position gain multiplier (3rd stage)
04974 Position gain multiplier (4th stage)
303
B-63947EN/01
304
7 PARAMETERS
#1 TC3 TC3 TC2 Tool change position PRM
0 0 1st reference position 1240-1243
0 1 2nd reference position
1 0 3rd reference position
1 1 4th reference position
#2 TMA Tool length measurement is enabled, along the Z-axis M series
only (0) / along each axis (1) PRM1022
#3 WMA Surface-based measurement of a workpiece origin M series
offset is enabled, along the Z-axis only (0) / along each
axis (1)
#4 WMH Hole-based measurement of a workpiece origin offset M series
value is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#5 WMC An axis for measurement of a workpiece origin offset M series
value is selected by, entering the axis name (0) / using PRM
the cursor (1) 5007#3=1
#6 3OC If tool length compensation is not canceled before ALM
3-dimensional coordinate system conversion is PS0049
specified, no alarm is issued (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
#7 3OF If commands for 3-dimensional coordinate system ALM
conversion and for tool length compensation are not PS0049
nested with each other, no alarm is issued (0) / an alarm
is issued (1)
05008 Tool radius and tool nose radius compensation
#1 CNC Interference check during tool radius and tool noise PRM
radius compensation 19607#5
#3 CNV CNV CNC Type of check
0 0 Direction and arc angle check
0 1 Arc angle check only
1 - Interference check disabled
#4 MCR If tool radius and tool nose radius compensation is ALM
specified in the MDI mode, no alarm is issued (0) / an PS5257
alarm is issued (1)
05009 Function for direct input of offset value measured B,
Imaginary tool tip direction
#0 GSC When the function for direct input of offset value T series
measured B is used, an offset write input signal is input PRM
from, machine side (0) / PMC side (1) 3003#3
#4 TSD When the function for direct input of offset value T series
measured B is used, the travel direction judgment PRM
specification is, invalid (0) / valid (1) 5004#3=0
#5 TIP The imaginary tool tip direction is, not used (0) / used (1)
05010 Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from tool
radius and tool nose radius compensation
05011 Constant denominator for 3-dimensional tool
compensation or tool length compensation in a specified
direction
05013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation PRM
5042#0 - 3
05014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear PRM
compensation 5042#0 - 3
05015 Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 T series
(X1P)
05016 Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 T series
(X1M)
05017 Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 T series
(Z1P)
05018 Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 T series
(Z1M)
05020 Tool offset number used with the function for direct inputT series
of offset value measured B PRM
5005#0
05021 Number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the T series
tool is about to touch the touch sensor PRM
5004#3=1
305
B-63947EN/01
05022 Distance (L) from reference tool tip position to the <Axis>
reference measurement surface M series
05024 Number of tool compensation values PRM5029
05028 Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code T series
command PRM3032
05029 Number of tool compensation value memories common PRM5024
to paths
05032 Direction of tool offset B M series
05033 Tool offset B function M series
#0 GOB The tool offset B function (for the gas stopper) is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
05040 Automatic tool change
#0 OWD When a tool offset value is set based on radius T series
programming, both geometry and wear compensation PRM
values are based on radius programming (0) / geometry 5004#1=1
compensation is based on radius programming and
wear compensation is based on diameter programming 7
for an axis based on diameter programming (1)
#2 MOF As the DI/DO signals used with the active offset value
modification function based on manual feed, G297#4 to
#6 and F297#5 are used (0) / G203#4 to #6 and F199#5
are used (1)
#3 TCT The tool change method is based on, turret rotation (0) / T series
automatic tool changer (1)
#4 TLG When the automatic tool changer is used, tool offset T series
operation is specified by, G43.7 (0) / G43 (1)
#6 NOY The Y-axis offset function is, used (0) / not used (1) T series
#7 NO4 The 4th-axis offset function is, used (0) / not used (1) T series
05041 Active offset value modification function based on
manual feed
#0 ACR When the active offset value modification mode based
on manual feed is selected in the reset state or cleared
state, the tool offset value is, changeable (0) / not
changeable (1)
#6 AON If a change is made to a tool offset value (or tool length PRM
compensation value used with tool length compensation 5001#6=0
A/B in the case of the M series) with the active offset
value modification function based on manual feed, the
change becomes effective, starting with the block
specifying the next G43, G44 or H code (M series) or
the block specifying the next T code (T series) (0) /
starting with the next block to be buffered (1)
#7 NM2 If overcutting can occur during tool offsetting because a ALM
block specifying no movement is specified, no alarm is PS0041
issued (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
05042 Tool offset value
#0 OFA OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit (mm) Valid data range (mm)
#1 OFC 0 0 0 1 0.01 ±9999.99
#2 OFD 0 0 0 0 0.001 ±9999.999
#3 OFE 0 0 1 0 0.0001 ±9999.9999
0 1 0 0 0.00001 ±9999.99999
1 0 0 0 0.000001 ±999.999999
OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit (inch) Valid data range (inch)
0 0 0 1 0.001 ±999.999
0 0 0 0 0.0001 ±999.9999
0 0 1 0 0.00001 ±999.99999
0 1 0 0 0.000001 ±999.999999
1 0 0 0 0.0000001 ±99.9999999
05043 Axis number for which the Y-axis offset function is used T series
05044 Axis number for which the 4th-axis offset function is T series
used PRM
5004#7
306
7 PARAMETERS
05051 Tool setter function for one-turret/two-spindle lathes T series
#0 2NR When the tool setter function for one-turret/two-spindle
lathes is used, one touch sensor is used (0) / two touch
sensors are used (1)
#1 2AT When a workpiece coordinate system shift amount is
set in the workpiece coordinate system memory with the
tool setter function for one-turret/two-spindle lathes, a
setting is made at the current cursor position (0) / an
automatic selection is made (1)
05053 Tool compensation number shift amount for the T series
one-turret/two-spindle tool setter function PRM5024
05054 Workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 1 T series
05055 Workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 2 PRM
5051#1=1
05056 Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 2 T series
(X2P)
05057 Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 2 T series
(X2M)
05058 Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 2 T series
(Z2P)
05059 Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 2 T series
(Z2M)
05071 Axis number of the 1st axis of the compensation plane M series
in grinding-wheel wear compensation
05072 Axis number of the 2nd axis of the compensation plane M series
in grinding-wheel wear compensation
05081 Coordinate of the 1st axis of compensation center 1 in M series
grinding-wheel wear compensation
05082 Coordinate of the 2nd axis of compensation center 1 in M series
grinding-wheel wear compensation
05083 Coordinate of the 1st axis of compensation center 2 in M series
grinding-wheel wear compensation
05084 Coordinate of the 2nd axis of compensation center 2 in M series
grinding-wheel wear compensation
05085 Coordinate of the 1st axis of compensation center 3 in M series
grinding-wheel wear compensation
05086 Coordinate of the 2nd axis of compensation center 3 in M series
grinding-wheel wear compensation
307
B-63947EN/01
#6 RAB When a drilling canned cycle using the Series 15 format PRM
is specified, address R, specifies an incremental 0001#0=1
command (0) / specifies an absolute command with G 5102#3=0
code system A or follows G90 and G91 with G code 3401#6,#7
system B or C (1)
#7 RDI When a drilling canned cycle using the Series 15 format PRM
is specified, address R is based on, radius programming 0001#0=1
(0) / diameter/radius programming of the drilling axis (1) 5102#3=0
1006#3
05103 Format for FS15, Canned cycle
#0 SIJ When the Series 15 format is used, a shift value for the M series
drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is specified by, address PRM
Q (0) / address I, J, or K (1) 0001#0=1
5148
#2 DCY When an axis (different from the drilling axis) PRM
perpendicular to the positioning plane is specified in a 5101#0=1
drilling canned cycle, the drilling axis is, the specified
axis (0) / the axis specified in the block where the G code 7
is specified (1)
#3 PNA When a plane where no axis is present is specified in a T series
drilling canned cycle using the Series 15 format, an PRM
alarm is issued (0) / no alarm is issued (1) 0001#0=1
5102#3=0
#6 TCZ In a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping), a check for PRM
zero accumulated pulse is, not made (0) / made (1) 2005#1
05104 Canned cycle
#2 FCK In a multiple repetitive turning canned cycle (G71/G72), T series
the machining profile is, not checked (0) / checked (1)
05105 Canned cycle
#0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner
rounding cycle, a single block stop is, not performed (0) /
performed (1)
#1 RF1 In a multiple repetitive turning canned cycle (G71/G72) T series
of type I, roughing is, performed (0) / not performed (1) PRM
0001#0=1
#2 RF2 In a multiple repetitive turning canned cycle (G71/G72) T series
of type II, roughing is, performed (0) / not performed (1) PRM
0001#0=1
#3 M5T When the rotation direction of the spindle is reversed in a
tapping cycle, M05 is, output before M04 or M03 (0) / not
output before M04 or M03 (1)
#4 K0D When K0 is specified in a drilling canned cycle (G80 to T series
G89), drilling data storage operation only is performed
(0) / one drilling operation is performed (1)
#5 TFA When a canned cycle is specified during tool center ALM
point control or during tool length compensation in the PS5424
tool axis direction, the rotary axis position is, not
checked (0) / checked (1)
#6 GIJ If the signs of I, J, and K do not match when a grinding ALM
canned cycle for M series is executed, an alarm is PS0455
issued (0) / operation compatible with the FS16i is
performed (1)
05106 Canned cycle G code
#0 GFX When a multiple repetitive turning canned cycle and
grinding canned cycle are enabled, the specification of
G71 to G74 is handled as, multiple repetitive turning
canned cycle (0) / grinding canned cycle (1)
05110 M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle T series
05111 Dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in T series
drilling canned cycle [ms] PRM
1013#0-#3
05112 Spindle forward-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle T series
05113 Spindle reverse-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle T series
05114 Return value of high-speed peck drilling cycle
05115 Clearance value in a peck drilling cycle
308
7 PARAMETERS
05130 Cutting value (chamfering value) in thread cutting cycles T series
G92 and G76
05131 Cutting angle in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76 T series
[deg]
05132 Depth of cut in multiple repetitive turning canned cycles T series
G71 and G72 Radius
05133 Escape in multiple repetitive turning canned cycles G71 T series
and G72 Radius
05134 Clearance value in multiple repetitive turning canned T series
cycles G71 and G72 Radius
05135 Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive turning T series
canned cycle G73 (2nd axis on the plane) Radius
05136 Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive turning T series
canned cycle G73 (1st axis on the plane) Radius
05137 Number of divisions in the multiple repetitive turning T series
canned cycle G73 [cycle]
05139 Return in multiple repetitive turning canned cycles G74 T series
and G75 Radius
05140 Minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive turning T series
canned cycle G76 Radius
05141 Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive turning T series
canned cycle G76 Radius
05142 Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive T series
turning canned cycle G76 [cycle]
05143 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive turning canned T series
cycle G76 [deg]
05145 Allowable value 1 in multiple repetitive turning canned T series
cycles G71 and G72 PRM
5104#2
05146 Allowable value 2 in multiple repetitive turning canned T series
cycles G71 and G72 PRM
5104#2
05148 Tool retraction direction after orientation in a fine boring M series
cycle or back boring cycle <Axis>
05149 Override for retraction in a boring cycle (G85 and G89)
[%]
05160 Small-hole peck drilling cycle
#1 OLS When an overload torque detection signal is received in
a small-hole peck drilling cycle, the feedrate and spindle
speed are, not changed (0) / changed (1)
#2 NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no
overload torque detection signal is received in a
small-hole peck drilling cycle, the feedrate and spindle
speed are, not changed (0) / changed (1)
#3 CYM When a subprogram call is specified in a block
specifying other commands in the canned cycle mode,
no alarm is issued (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
05163 M code that specifies the small-hole peck drilling cycle
mode
05164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the
start of the next advancing after an overload torque
detection signal is received [%]
S2=S1×d1÷100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
d1: Value set in parameter No. 5164 [%]
05165 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the
start of the next advancing when no overload torque
detection signal is received [%]
S2=S1×d2÷100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
d2: Value set in parameter No. 5165 [%]
309
B-63947EN/01
310
7 PARAMETERS
#5 PCP A high-speed peck tapping cycle is, used (0) / not used
(1)
#6 FHD During rigid tapping, feed hold and single block
operations are, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 SRS To select a spindle used for rigid tapping in multi-spindle T series
control, the spindle selection signals (shared for
multi-spindle control) are used (0) / the rigid tapping
spindle selection signals (dedicated to rigid tapping) are
used (1)
05201 Rigid tapping, Override
#2 TDR For a cutting time constant in rigid tapping, the same PRM
parameter is used for cutting and extraction (0) / a 5261-5264
different parameter is used for each of cutting and 5271-5274
extraction (1)
#3 OVU The increment unit of override for rigid tapping extraction PRM5211
is, 1% (0) / 10% (1)
#4 OV3 Override programmed for extraction is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
05202 Rigid tapping
#0 ORI When rigid tapping is started, spindle orientation is, not PRM4073
performed (0) / performed (1)
#3 CHR Conventional rigid tapping is performed (0) /
interpolation type rigid tapping is performed (1)
#4 IRR At the time of movement from point I to point R in rigid PRM
tapping, the in-position width of point R is, dedicated to 5300,5302
rigid tapping (0) / normal in-position width (1) 5304,5306
1826
05203 Rigid tapping by the manual handle
#0 HRG Rigid tapping by the manual handle is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#1 HRM When the tapping axis moves in the negative direction in
rigid tapping by the manual handle, the spindle rotates,
in the forward direction in the G84 mode and in the
reverse direction in the G74 mode (0) / in the reverse
direction in the G84 mode and in the forward direction in
the G74 mode (1)
#2 RFF In rigid tapping, feed forward is, disabled (0) / enabled Serial
(1)
#4 OVS In rigid tapping, override by the feedrate override select
signal and cancellation of override by the override cancel
signal are, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#5 RBL As acc./dec. for rigid tapping cutting feed, linear
acc./dec. is used (0) / bell-shaped acc./dec. is used (1)
05210 Rigid tapping mode specification M code
05211 Override value during rigid tapping extraction [%] PRM
5200#4=1
5201#3
05213 Return in peck rigid tapping cycle PRM
5200#5
05214 Setting of an allowable rigid tapping synchronization
error range [Detection unit]
05221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping
(1st gear)
05222 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping
(2nd gear)
05223 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping
(3rd gear)
05224 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping T series
(4th gear)
05231 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid
tapping (1st gear)
05232 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid
tapping (2nd gear)
05233 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid
tapping (3rd gear)
311
B-63947EN/01
05234 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid T series
tapping (4th gear)
05241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (1st gear)
[min-1]
05242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (2nd gear)
[min-1]
05243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (3rd gear)
[min-1]
05244 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (4th gear) T series
[min-1]
05261 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping for each gear
(1st gear) [ms]
05262 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping for each gear
(2nd gear) [ms]
05263 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping for each gear
(3rd gear) [ms]
05264 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping for each gear T series 7
(4th gear) [ms]
05271 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping extraction
(1st gear) [ms]
05272 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping extraction
(2nd gear) [ms]
05273 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping extraction
(3rd gear) [ms]
05274 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping extraction T series
(4th gear) [ms]
05280 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping
axis in rigid tapping (common to gears) [0.01/sec]
05281 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping
axis in rigid tapping (1st gear) [0.01/sec]
05282 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping
axis in rigid tapping (2nd gear) [0.01/sec]
05283 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping
axis in rigid tapping (3rd gear) [0.01/sec]
05284 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping T series
axis in rigid tapping (4th gear) [0.01/sec]
05291 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping
(1st gear)
05292 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping
(2nd gear)
05293 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping
(3rd gear)
05294 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping T series
(4th gear)
05300 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping <Axis>
(1st spindle) [Detection unit]
05301 Spindle in-position width in rigid tapping [Detection unit]
05302 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping <Axis>
(2nd spindle) [Detection unit]
05304 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping <Axis>
(3rd spindle) [Detection unit]
05306 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping <Axis>
(4th spindle) [Detection unit]
05310 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis <Axis>
movement in rigid tapping (1st spindle) [Detection unit]
05311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during
movement in rigid tapping [Detection unit]
05312 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis <Axis>
is stopped in rigid tapping (1st spindle) [Detection unit]
05313 Positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is
stopped in rigid tapping [Detection unit]
05321 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (1st-stage gear)
[Detection unit]
312
7 PARAMETERS
05322 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (2nd-stage gear)
[Detection unit]
05323 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (3rd-stage gear)
[Detection unit]
05324 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (4th-stage gear) T series
[Detection unit]
05350 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis <Axis>
movement in rigid tapping (2nd spindle) [Detection unit]
05352 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis <Axis>
is stopped in rigid tapping (2nd spindle) [Detection unit]
05354 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis <Axis>
movement in rigid tapping (3rd spindle) [Detection unit]
05356 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis <Axis>
is stopped in rigid tapping (3rd spindle) [Detection unit]
05358 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis <Axis>
movement in rigid tapping (4th spindle) [Detection unit]
05360 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis <Axis>
is stopped in rigid tapping (4th spindle) [Detection unit]
05365 Bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant in rigid tapping
(1st-stage gear) [ms]
05366 Bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant in rigid tapping
(2nd-stage gear) [ms]
05367 Bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant in rigid tapping
(3rd-stage gear) [ms]
05368 Bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant in rigid tapping T series
(4th-stage gear) [ms]
05381 Override value during rigid tapping return [%] PRM
5200#4=1
05382 Amount of return for rigid tapping return
313
B-63947EN/01
314
7 PARAMETERS
05502 Index table indexing
#0 IXS When the same block includes a command for the index
table indexing axis and a command for another controlled
axis, alarm PS1564 is issued (0) / the commands are
executed (1)
05510 Controlled axis number of the index table indexing axis
05511 M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction for PRM
index table indexing 5500#2
=1, #3
05512 Minimum positioning angle for the index table indexing axis
315
B-63947EN/01
05680 Numerator for determining the gear ratio for flexible synchronous
control (group A)
Gear ratio=q/(p×10k)
Numerator: q, Denominator: p, Denominator factor: k
05681 Denominator for determining the gear ratio for flexible
synchronous control (group A)
05682 Numerator for determining the gear ratio for flexible synchronous
control (group B)
05683 Denominator for determining the gear ratio for flexible
synchronous control (group B)
05684 Numerator for determining the gear ratio for flexible synchronous
control (group C)
05685 Denominator for determining the gear ratio for flexible
synchronous control (group C)
05686 Numerator for determining the gear ratio for flexible synchronous
control (group D)
05687 Denominator for determining the gear ratio for flexible 7
synchronous control (group D)
05690 Exponent for the denominator for determining the gear ratio for
flexible synchronous control (group A)
05691 Exponent for the denominator for determining the gear ratio for
flexible synchronous control (group B)
05692 Exponent for the denominator for determining the gear ratio for
flexible synchronous control (group C)
05693 Exponent for the denominator for determining the gear ratio for
flexible synchronous control (group D)
316
7 PARAMETERS
05743 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number c
of moving axis 2
05744 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number d
of moving axis 2
05751 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number a
of moving axis 3
05752 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number b
of moving axis 3
05753 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number c
of moving axis 3
05754 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number d
of moving axis 3
05761 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
a of moving axis 1 [Detection unit]
05762 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
b of moving axis 1 [Detection unit]
05763 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
c of moving axis 1 [Detection unit]
05764 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
d of moving axis 1 [Detection unit]
05771 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
a of moving axis 2 [Detection unit]
05772 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
b of moving axis 2 [Detection unit]
05773 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
c of moving axis 2 [Detection unit]
05774 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
d of moving axis 2 [Detection unit]
05781 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
a of moving axis 3 [Detection unit]
05782 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
b of moving axis 3 [Detection unit]
05783 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
c of moving axis 3 [Detection unit]
05784 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
d of moving axis 3 [Detection unit]
317
B-63947EN/01
318
7 PARAMETERS
#3 MGE Modal G code calling is performed, for each block (0) /
after movement (1)
#4 CVA Macro call arguments are passed, in the NC format
without modification (0) / after being converted to the
macro format (1)
#6 VER For the workpiece coordinates (#5041 - #5060, #100101 -
#100150) and system variables, acc./dec. and positional
deviations are, not considered (0) / considered (1)
06008 Operation command
#0 F16 The precision of operation results is based on, new
specification (0) / FS16i-compatible specification (1)
#1 MCA The alarm number displayed with a macro alarm using
system variable #3000 is, the number obtained by adding
3000 to the value assigned to #3000 (0) / the number
assigned to #3000 (1)
#2 DSM On the custom macro screen, the rewriting of a system
variable that can be specified on the left side with MDI
keys is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#3 KOP When the NC is reset in the state where the line is made
open by POPEN, communication continues with the line
left open (0)/communication stops with the line closed (1)
#4 ISO The code used to specify the bit patterns of codes that PRM
substitute for [, ], #, *, =, ?, @, &, and _ by using 6010-
parameters is, EIA (0) / ISO/ASCII (1) 6018
#5 ADD When the number of digits in the integer part, a, in the
format specification [a,b] of the DPRNT statement is less
than the number of digits in the integer part of an output
variable value, just the specified number of digits are
output (0) / an alarm for excessive digits is issued (1)
#6 GMP The calling of M, S, T, a 2nd auxiliary function code, or a
particular code during the calling of a G code, and the
calling of a G code during the calling of M, S, T, a 2nd
auxiliary function code, or a particular code are, not
allowed (0) / allowed (1)
#7 IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments,
argument specification I or II is automatically determined
(0) / argument specification I is used at all times (1)
06010 Code bit pattern “*”
#0 *0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 *1 6008#4
#2 *2
#3 *3
#4 *4
#5 *5
#6 *6
#7 *7
06011 Code bit pattern “=”
#0 =0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 =1 6008#4
#2 =2
#3 =3
#4 =4
#5 =5
#6 =6
#7 =7
06012 Code bit pattern “#”
#0 #0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 #1 6008#4
#2 #2
#3 #3
#4 #4
#5 #5
#6 #6
#7 #7
319
B-63947EN/01
320
7 PARAMETERS
06033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt PRM
06034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt 6003#4
06036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path
(for #100 to #199 (#499) )
06037 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path
(for #500 to #999)
06038 Start G code used to call a custom macro
06039 Start program number of a custom macro called by G
code
06040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros PRM
6007#3
6038,
6039
06041 Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom
macro
06042 Start program number of a custom macro called by G
code with a decimal point
06043 Number of G codes with a decimal point used to call PRM
custom macros 6007#3
6041,
6042
06044 Start M code used to call a subprogram
06045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code
06046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of PRM
subprograms called by M codes) 6044,
6045
06047 Start M code used to call a custom macro
06048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M
code
06049 Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number PRM
of custom macros called by M codes) 6047,
6048
06050 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9010
06051 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9011
06052 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9012
06053 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9013
06054 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9014
06055 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9015
06056 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9016
06057 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9017
06058 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9018
06059 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9019
06060 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9040
06061 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9041
06062 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9042
06063 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9043
06064 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9044
06065 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9045
06066 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9046
06067 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9047
06068 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9048
06069 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9049
06071 M code used to call the subprogram of program No. 9001
06072 M code used to call the subprogram of program No. 9002
321
B-63947EN/01
322
7 PARAMETERS
06201 High-speed skip, skip functions
#1 SEB When the skip function is used and a skip signal is
turned on, the accumulated pulses and positional
deviation due to acc./dec. are, not considered (0) /
considered and compensated (1)
#2 TSE When the torque limit skip command is specified, the
skip position held in a system variables from #5061 to
#5080 (#100151 to #100182) is, offset position that has
considered a servo delay (0) / position that does not
consider a servo delay (1)
#4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP,
SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are, enabled as skip
signals (0) / disabled as skip signals (1)
#5 CSE When the continuous high-speed skip command is
used, high-speed skip signals are assumed to be input,
on the rising edge or falling edge as set by parameter
(No. 6200#6) (0) / on both of the rising edge and falling
edge (1)
#7 SKPXE When the skip function is used, the skip signal SKIP is, PRM
enabled (0) / disabled (1) 6200#0
6401#4
06202 High-speed skip signal/multi-step skip signal selection
#0 1S1 As a high-speed skip signal, the HDI0 signal is, not used
(0) / used (1). Alternatively, for G31P1/G04Q1, the SKIP
signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#1 1S2 As a high-speed skip signal, the HDI1 signal is, not used
(0) / used (1). Alternatively, for G31P1/G04Q1, the
SKIP2 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#2 1S3 As a high-speed skip signal, the HDI2 signal is, not used
(0) / used (1). Alternatively, for G31P1/G04Q1, the
SKIP3 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 1S4 As a high-speed skip signal, the HDI3 signal is, not used
(0) / used (1). Alternatively, for G31P1/G04Q1, the
SKIP4 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#4 1S5 As a high-speed skip signal, the HDI4 signal is, not used
(0) / used (1). Alternatively, for G31P1/G04Q1, the
SKIP5 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#5 1S6 As a high-speed skip signal, the HDI5 signal is, not used
(0) / used (1). Alternatively, for G31P1/G04Q1, the
SKIP6 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#6 1S7 As a high-speed skip signal, the HDI6 signal is, not used
(0) / used (1). Alternatively, for G31P1/G04Q1, the
SKIP7 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#7 1S8 As a high-speed skip signal, the HDI7 signal is, not used
(0) / used (1). Alternatively, for G31P1/G04Q1, the
SKIP8 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
06203 Multi-step skip signal selection
#0 2S1 For G31P2/G04Q2, the SKIP signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#1 2S2 For G31P2/G04Q2, the SKIP2 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#2 2S3 For G31P2/G04Q2, the SKIP3 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 2S4 For G31P2/G04Q2, the SKIP4 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#4 2S5 For G31P2/G04Q2, the SKIP5 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#5 2S6 For G31P2/G04Q2, the SKIP6 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#6 2S7 For G31P2/G04Q2, the SKIP7 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#7 2S8 For G31P2/G04Q2, the SKIP8 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
06204 Multi-step skip signal selection
#0 3S1 For G31P3/G04Q3, the SKIP signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#1 3S2 For G31P3/G04Q3, the SKIP2 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#2 3S3 For G31P3/G04Q3, the SKIP3 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 3S4 For G31P3/G04Q3, the SKIP4 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#4 3S5 For G31P3/G04Q3, the SKIP5 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#5 3S6 For G31P3/G04Q3, the SKIP6 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#6 3S7 For G31P3/G04Q3, the SKIP7 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#7 3S8 For G31P3/G04Q3, the SKIP8 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
323
B-63947EN/01
324
7 PARAMETERS
06242 Feedrate in tool measurement 2 measurement PRM6241
06243 Feedrate in tool measurement 3 measurement
06251 Deceleration position (γ value) in automatic tool length
measurement
06252 Deceleration position (γ value) in tool measurement 2 PRM6251
06253 Deceleration position (γ value) in tool measurement 3
06254 Allowable measurement position arrival signal range
(ε value) in automatic tool length measurement
06255 Allowable measurement position arrival signal range PRM6254
(ε value) in tool measurement 2
06256 Allowable measurement position arrival signal range
(ε value) in tool measurement 3
06281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31) PRM
6207#1=1
06282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1) PRM
06283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2) 6207#2=1
06284 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3)
06285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4)
06286 Torque limit override function <Axis>
#0 TQO The torque limit override function is, disabled (100%) (0)
/ enabled (1)
06287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip <Axis>
[Detection unit]
325
B-63947EN/01
326
7 PARAMETERS
06419 M code (1) in group C for the manual handle retrace
06420 M code (2) in group C for the manual handle retrace
06421 M code (3) in group C for the manual handle retrace
06422 M code (4) in group C for the manual handle retrace
06423 M code (1) in group D for the manual handle retrace
06424 M code (2) in group D for the manual handle retrace
06425 M code (3) in group D for the manual handle retrace
06426 M code (4) in group D for the manual handle retrace
06427 M code (1) in group E for the manual handle retrace
06428 M code (2) in group E for the manual handle retrace
06429 M code (3) in group E for the manual handle retrace
06430 M code (4) in group E for the manual handle retrace
06431 M code (1) in group F for the manual handle retrace
06432 M code (2) in group F for the manual handle retrace
06433 M code (3) in group F for the manual handle retrace
06434 M code (4) in group F for the manual handle retrace
06435 M code (1) in group G for the manual handle retrace
06436 M code (2) in group G for the manual handle retrace
06437 M code (3) in group G for the manual handle retrace
06438 M code (4) in group G for the manual handle retrace
06439 M code (1) in group H for the manual handle retrace
06440 M code (2) in group H for the manual handle retrace
06441 M code (3) in group H for the manual handle retrace
06442 M code (4) in group H for the manual handle retrace
06443 M code (1) in group I for the manual handle retrace
06444 M code (2) in group I for the manual handle retrace
06445 M code (3) in group I for the manual handle retrace
06446 M code (4) in group I for the manual handle retrace
06447 M code (1) in group J for the manual handle retrace
06448 M code (2) in group J for the manual handle retrace
06449 M code (3) in group J for the manual handle retrace
06450 M code (4) in group J for the manual handle retrace
06451 M code (1) in group K for the manual handle retrace
06452 M code (2) in group K for the manual handle retrace
06453 M code (3) in group K for the manual handle retrace
06454 M code (4) in group K for the manual handle retrace
06455 M code (1) in group L for the manual handle retrace
06456 M code (2) in group L for the manual handle retrace
06457 M code (3) in group L for the manual handle retrace
06458 M code (4) in group L for the manual handle retrace
06459 M code (1) in group M for the manual handle retrace
06460 M code (2) in group M for the manual handle retrace
06461 M code (3) in group M for the manual handle retrace
06462 M code (4) in group M for the manual handle retrace
06463 M code (1) in group N for the manual handle retrace
06464 M code (2) in group N for the manual handle retrace
06465 M code (3) in group N for the manual handle retrace
06466 M code (4) in group N for the manual handle retrace
06467 M code (1) in group O for the manual handle retrace
06468 M code (2) in group O for the manual handle retrace
06469 M code (3) in group O for the manual handle retrace
06470 M code (4) in group O for the manual handle retrace
06471 M code (1) in group P for the manual handle retrace
06472 M code (2) in group P for the manual handle retrace
06473 M code (3) in group P for the manual handle retrace
06474 M code (4) in group P for the manual handle retrace
06475 M code (1) in group Q for the manual handle retrace
06476 M code (2) in group Q for the manual handle retrace
06477 M code (3) in group Q for the manual handle retrace
06478 M code (4) in group Q for the manual handle retrace
06479 M code (1) in group R for the manual handle retrace
06480 M code (2) in group R for the manual handle retrace
327
B-63947EN/01
328
7 PARAMETERS
7.2.38 Tool Life Management
06800 Number of tool life groups and number of tools
#0 GS1 Setting the combination of the number of tool life PRM6813
groups and the number of tools
#1 GS2 Number When GS1,
GS2 GS1 Number of groups GS2, and
of tools
1/8 of the maximum LTM are
0 0 32 changed,
number of sets (No. 6813)
1/4 of the maximum the data
0 1 16 needs to be
number of sets (No. 6813)
1/2 of the maximum set again
1 0 8 by
number of sets (No. 6813)
Maximum number of sets specifying
1 1 4 G10 L3;.
(No. 6813)
#2 LTM Tool life count type is specified by, count (0) / time (1)
#3 SIG When signal-based tool skip is performed, group
number input using the tool group number selection
signal is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
#4 GRS If the life of the group specified by the tool group
number selection signal has expired when the tool
change reset signal TLRST is input, the execution
data of the group is cleared (0) / the execution data of
all registered groups is cleared (1)
#5 SNG If the tool skip signal TLSKP is input while a tool not PRM
under tool life management is being used, the tools of 6800#3
the most recently used group or the specified group
are skipped (0) / the signal is ignored (1)
#6 IGI The back number of a tool is, not ignored (0) / ignored
(1)
#7 M6T A T code included in a block specifying M06 specifies,
back number (0) / next tool group (1)
06801 Tool life management functions, Tool management
functions
#1 TSM When multiple offsets are specified with the tool life T series
management function, life count operation is
performed, for each identical tool number (0) / for
each tool (1)
#2 LVF When the value of life is counted based on time with
the tool management function or the tool life
management function, the tool life count override
signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 are, invalid (0) / valid (1)
#3 EMD The mark "*" used with the tool life management
function to indicate the expiration of life is displayed,
when the next tool is used (0) / when the tool life has
expired (1)
#7 M6E If a T code is specified in a block including M06, the T PRM
code specifies a return number or the group number 6800#7
to be selected next (0) / life counting of the tool group
is started immediately (1)
329
B-63947EN/01
330
7 PARAMETERS
#6 TRU When life counting is based on time specification and PRM
is performed at intervals of 1 second, a cutting time 6805#0
less than 1 second is not counted (0) / a cutting time
less than 1 second is rounded upward to 1 second
and counted (1)
#7 TAD When tool change method D is used, and a block PRM
specifying M06 includes no T command, the alarm 6801#7=1
(PS0153) is issued (0) / no alarm is issued (1)
06810 Tool life management ignore number
06811 M code for tool life count restart
06813 Maximum number of tool life management sets [set] To use tool
The maximum number of sets of each path is set as a life
multiple of 8 so that the total number of sets of all manage-
paths does not exceed the total number of sets of the ment, this
entire system (256 sets). parameter
needs to be
set.
06844 Remaining tool life (use count)
06845 Remaining tool life (use time) [min] PRM
6805#0
331
B-63947EN/01
332
7 PARAMETERS
7.2.40 Manual/Automatic Operation Functions
07001 Manual intervention, Manual numerical command
#1 ABS For the move command after manual intervention in the
manual absolute on state, a different path is used for each
of G90 and G91 (0) / the same path is used for G90 and
G91 (1)
#2 JST During operation based on manual numerical specification,
the STL signal indicating that automatic operation is being
started is, not output (0) / output (1)
#4 JSN When an S code is specified with the manual numerical
specification function, the modal display of the S code is,
not updated (0) / updated (1)
#6 JEX The number of simultaneously controlled axes for jog feed,
follows the setting of parameter (No. 1002#0) (0) / is the
maximum number of simultaneously controlled axes (1)
07002 Manual numerical command
#0 JMF In manual numerical specification, M function specification
is, allowed (0) / not allowed (1)
#1 JSF In manual numerical specification, S function specification
is, allowed (0) / not allowed (1)
#2 JTF In manual numerical specification, T function specification
is, allowed (0) / not allowed (1)
#3 JBF In manual numerical specification, B function specification
is, allowed (0) / not allowed (1)
07010 Manual numerical command <Axis>
#0 JMV In manual numerical specification, axis movement
specification is, allowed (0) / not allowed (1)
07040 Tool retract and recover
#0 TRI The G10.6 command for tool retract and recover is,
assumed to be an absolute or incremental command
according to the setting of the absolute/incremental mode
(0) / assumed to be an incremental command at all times
(1)
#1 TRS After the completion of repositioning in tool retract and
recover, automatic operation is restarted (0) / operation
stops when the single block switch is on. When a cycle
start is executed again, automatic operation is started. (1)
#2 RPS When the tool retract signal TRESC is set to 1 after G10.6 PRM
is specified alone, the tool is, not retracted (0) / retracted 7041
(1)
#3 TRC When automatic operation is restarted after tool retract and
recover operation is executed during the execution of a
drilling canned cycle, the same drilling cycle is performed
(0) / the next drilling cycle is performed (1)
07041 Retraction distance in tool retract and recover <Axis>
PRM
7040#2
07051 Manual/automatic operation
#6 EMI When automatic/manual simultaneous operation is M series
performed, only manual operation of setup type is enabled
(0) / manual operations of interrupt type and setup type are
enabled (1)
07055 Bell-shaped acc./dec. before interpolation
#3 BCG The bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant change function
before interpolation is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
07066 Acceleration/deceleration reference speed for the
bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant change function
333
B-63947EN/01
334
7 PARAMETERS
07185 Withdrawal feedrate (common to the 1st and 2nd butting
operations) in reference position setting with mechanical
stopper
07186 Torque limit value in reference position setting with <Axis>
mechanical stopper
07187 Torque limit value in reference position setting with <Axis>
mechanical stopper or grid-based reference position PRM
return with mechanical stopper 7186
07188 Grid-based reference position return with mechanical <Axis>
stopper
#0 GRS Grid-based reference position return with mechanical
stopper is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
#7 RNW Until the sign (positive/negative) of a servo positional
deviation is reversed in grid-based reference position
return with mechanical stopper, the grid is, not ignored (0)
/ ignored (1)
335
B-63947EN/01
336
7 PARAMETERS
07257 Name of general-purpose switch 5 on software operator's
panel (6th character)
07258 Name of general-purpose switch 5 on software operator's
panel (7th character)
07259 Name of general-purpose switch 5 on software operator's
panel (8th character)
07260 Name of general-purpose switch 6 on software operator's
panel (1st character)
07261 Name of general-purpose switch 6 on software operator's
panel (2nd character)
07262 Name of general-purpose switch 6 on software operator's
panel (3rd character)
07263 Name of general-purpose switch 6 on software operator's
panel (4th character)
07264 Name of general-purpose switch 6 on software operator's
panel (5th character)
07265 Name of general-purpose switch 6 on software operator's
panel (6th character)
07266 Name of general-purpose switch 6 on software operator's
panel (7th character)
07267 Name of general-purpose switch 6 on software operator's
panel (8th character)
07268 Name of general-purpose switch 7 on software operator's
panel (1st character)
07269 Name of general-purpose switch 7 on software operator's
panel (2nd character)
07270 Name of general-purpose switch 7 on software operator's
panel (3rd character)
07271 Name of general-purpose switch 7 on software operator's
panel (4th character)
07272 Name of general-purpose switch 7 on software operator's
panel (5th character)
07273 Name of general-purpose switch 7 on software operator's
panel (6th character)
07274 Name of general-purpose switch 7 on software operator's
panel (7th character)
07275 Name of general-purpose switch 7 on software operator's
panel (8th character)
07276 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's
panel (1st character)
07277 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's
panel (2nd character)
07278 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's
panel (3rd character)
07279 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's
panel (4th character)
07280 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's
panel (5th character)
07281 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's
panel (6th character)
07282 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's
panel (7th character)
07283 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's
panel (8th character)
07284 Name of general-purpose switch 9 on software operator's
panel (1st character)
07285 Name of general-purpose switch 9 on software operator's
panel (2nd character)
07286 Name of general-purpose switch 9 on software operator's
panel (3rd character)
07287 Name of general-purpose switch 9 on software operator's
panel (4th character)
07288 Name of general-purpose switch 9 on software operator's
panel (5th character)
337
B-63947EN/01
338
7 PARAMETERS
07362 Name of general-purpose switch 12 on software operator's
panel (3rd character)
07363 Name of general-purpose switch 12 on software operator's
panel (4th character)
07364 Name of general-purpose switch 12 on software operator's
panel (5th character)
07365 Name of general-purpose switch 12 on software operator's
panel (6th character)
07366 Name of general-purpose switch 12 on software operator's
panel (7th character)
07367 Name of general-purpose switch 12 on software operator's
panel (8th character)
07368 Name of general-purpose switch 13 on software operator's
panel (1st character)
07369 Name of general-purpose switch 13 on software operator's
panel (2nd character)
07370 Name of general-purpose switch 13 on software operator's
panel (3rd character)
07371 Name of general-purpose switch 13 on software operator's
panel (4th character)
07372 Name of general-purpose switch 13 on software operator's
panel (5th character)
07373 Name of general-purpose switch 13 on software operator's
panel (6th character)
07374 Name of general-purpose switch 13 on software operator's
panel (7th character)
07375 Name of general-purpose switch 13 on software operator's
panel (8th character)
07376 Name of general-purpose switch 14 on software operator's
panel (1st character)
07377 Name of general-purpose switch 14 on software operator's
panel (2nd character)
07378 Name of general-purpose switch 14 on software operator's
panel (3rd character)
07379 Name of general-purpose switch 14 on software operator's
panel (4th character)
07380 Name of general-purpose switch 14 on software operator's
panel (5th character)
07381 Name of general-purpose switch 14 on software operator's
panel (6th character)
07382 Name of general-purpose switch 14 on software operator's
panel (7th character)
07383 Name of general-purpose switch 14 on software operator's
panel (8th character)
07384 Name of general-purpose switch 15 on software operator's
panel (1st character)
07385 Name of general-purpose switch 15 on software operator's
panel (2nd character)
07386 Name of general-purpose switch 15 on software operator's
panel (3rd character)
07387 Name of general-purpose switch 15 on software operator's
panel (4th character)
07388 Name of general-purpose switch 15 on software operator's
panel (5th character)
07389 Name of general-purpose switch 15 on software operator's
panel (6th character)
07390 Name of general-purpose switch 15 on software operator's
panel (7th character)
07391 Name of general-purpose switch 15 on software operator's
panel (8th character)
07392 Name of general-purpose switch 16 on software operator's
panel (1st character)
07393 Name of general-purpose switch 16 on software operator's
panel (2nd character)
339
B-63947EN/01
340
7 PARAMETERS
07575 Fixture offset on each axis M series,
<Axis>
#0 FAX Fixture offset on each axis is, disabled (0) / enabled (1) M series
07580 Rotary axis for fixture offset (1st group) M series
07581 Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (1st group) M series
07582 Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (1st group) M series
07583 Rotary axis for fixture offset (2nd group) M series
07584 Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (2nd group) M series
07585 Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (2nd group) M series
07586 Rotary axis for fixture offset (3rd group) M series
07587 Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (3rd group) M series
07588 Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (3rd group) M series
341
B-63947EN/01
07621 Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotary axis for ALM
polygon turning [min-1] PS5018
07631 Allowable spindle speed deviation level in polygon
machining with two spindles [min-1]
07632 Steady state confirmation time duration in polygon PRM7631
machining with two spindles [ms]
07635 Ratio of slave spindle speed in spindle
synchronization control PRM
7603#2=1
07636 Maximum allowable slave spindle speed in spindle
synchronization control [min-1]
07640 Master axis in polygon machining with two spindles PRM
7641,3411
or later
07641 Polygon synchronous axis in polygon machining with PRM
two spindles 7640,3411or
later
7
07642 Master axis in polygon machining with two spindles PRM
(spindle number common to the system) 7640,7641
7643,3411or
later
07643 Polygon synchronous axis in polygon machining with PRM
two spindles (spindle number common to the system) 7640,7641
7642,3411or
later
342
7 PARAMETERS
07705 Simple spindle EGB function
#0 SEG The simple spindle EGB function is, not used (0) /
used (1)
07709 Number of the axial feed axis for helical compensation
07710 Synchronous axis number
07717 Synchronization cancellation delay time for an EGB
axis [0.1sec]
07731 G code for EGB specification
#0 EFX For EGB specification, G80 and G81 are used (0) / Canned
G80.4 and G81.4 are used (1) cycle
#1 EHF Feed-forward control on the axial feed axis for helical PRM
compensation is, enabled only during cutting (0) / 1800#3
enabled always in the G81 synchronous mode (1)
#3 ECN When the automatic phase synchronization function
for the EGB is disabled, alarm PS1595 is issued for
the G81 or G81.5 command specified during EGB
synchronization (0) / the G81 or G81.5 command
specified during EGB synchronization is allowed (1)
#4 RTS If an OT alarm or axis system malfunction protection
alarm is issued during EGB retract operation,
movement is stopped, on only the alarm-issued axis
(0) / on all axes (1)
#5 HBR When the EGB synchronization start command G81.4
is specified, the number of teeth is specified, by T (0) /
by R (1)
07740 Feedrate during retraction <Axis>
07741 Retracted distance <Axis>
07745 Time constant for linear acc./dec. in axis-by-axis <Axis>
retract operation [ms]PRM
7704#0,
7740
07772 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about 4 pulses
the tool axis [Detection unit] with the
A/B phase
detector
07773 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about
the workpiece axis [Detection unit]
07776 Feedrate during automatic phase synchronization for PRM1420
the workpiece axis [deg/min]
07777 Angle shifted from the spindle position (one-rotation
signal position) the workpiece axis uses as the
reference of phase synchronization [deg]
07778 Acceleration for acc./dec. for the workpiece axis <Axis>
[deg/sec2]
07782 Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB <Axis>
master axis rotation [Detection unit] 4 pulses
with the
A/B phase
detector
07783 Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB <Axis>
slave axis rotation [Detection unit]
07784 Numerator of a signal-based servo EGB <Axis>
synchronization ratio
07785 Denominator of a signal-based servo EGB <Axis>
synchronization ratio
343
B-63947EN/01
344
7 PARAMETERS
#6 NCI In PMC axis control, an in-position check at the time of PRM1826
deceleration is, performed (0) / not performed (1)
08005 Travel distance on PMC-controlled axes
#0 EDC In PMC axis control, the external deceleration function
is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 CDI When a PMC-controlled axis is specified by diameter PRM
programming, a travel distance is based on radius 1006#3=1
specification (0) / a travel distance is based on
diameter specification and a feedrate command is
base on radius specification (1)
#2 R10 When parameter (No. 8002#0) is set to 1, the unit for
specifying a rapid traverse rate for the PMC axis is, 1
mm/min (0) / 10 mm/min (1)
#3 DRR For cutting feed (feed per revolution) in PMC axis
control, dry run is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 EVP A speed command in PMC axis control is based on, PRM
speed specification (0) / position specification (1) 8007#2=1
#5 IFV When parameter (No. 8001#2) is set to 1 in PMC axis
control, the feedrate override signal *EFOVx and the
override cancel signal OVC are, used on a
path-by-path basis (0) / used on a group-by-group
basis (1)
08006 Machine lock for each axis
#1 MLS When the all axis machine lock signal is disabled in PRM
PMC axis control, axis-by-axis machine lock is, 8001#0=1
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 EFD When cutting feed (feed per minute) is used in PMC PRM
axis control, the specification unit of feedrate data is, 8002#3
unchanged (1 times) (0) / 100 times greater (1)
#6 EZR In PMC axis control, parameter (No. 1005#0) is,
invalid (0) / valid (1)
08007 Speed command
#2 VCP The PMC axis control speed command is based on,
FS15 specification (0) / FS16 specification (1)
08008 Mirror image <Axis>
#0 EMR When a PMC axis control command is issued in mirror MI1 to MI8
image mode, the mirror image is, not considered (0) / PRM12#0
considered (1)
08010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled <Axis>
by the PMC
08011 Real time custom macros <Axis>
#0 XRT The axis that uses the group specified by parameter
(No. 8010) is, not controlled by the real time custom
macro (0) / controlled by the real time custom macro
(1)
08020 FL feedrate for reference position return along each <Axis>
axis in PMC axis control PRM1425
08022 Upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis <Axis>
control
08028 Time for acc./dec. calculation when a feedrate is <Axis>
specified under PMC axis control [ms]
08030 Time constant for exponential acc./dec. in cutting feed <Axis>
or continuous feed under PMC axis control [ms]
08031 FL feedrate for exponential acc./dec. in cutting feed or <Axis>
continuous feed under PMC axis control
08032 Feedrate for acc./dec. calculation when a feedrate is <Axis>
specified under PMC axis control [min-1]
08040 Travel distance per motor revolution viewed in the <Axis>
least command increment when a position is specified
with a PMC axis control speed command
345
B-63947EN/01
7.2.51 Multi-path
08100 Multi-path control
#0 RST The pressing of the [RESET] key on the MDI panel is, valid
for all paths within the same machine group (0) / valid only
for a selected path (1)
#1 IAL When an alarm is issued with one path during automatic
operation, the other path is, stopped (0) / not stopped (1)
#6 DSB The inter-path single block check function is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#7 NWP Servo activation is turned on, together with other machine
groups (0) / independently of other machine groups (1)
08103 Waiting M code
#0 MWT As the signal interface for the waiting M code, the signal PRM
interface for three paths is used (0) / the signal interface 8103#0
for two paths is used (1)
#1 MWP To specify a P command for the waiting M code/balance
cut, a binary value is used (0) / a path number combination 7
is used (1)
08104 Loader control
#0 LSL A loader path screen is selected by, path selection signal
(0) / SHIFT+HELP or signal G251.1 (1)
08110 Waiting M code range (minimum value)
08111 Waiting M code range (maximum value)
346
7 PARAMETERS
7.2.53 Synchronous/Composite Control and
Superimposed Control
08160 Synchronous, composite, and superimposed control
#4 AXS When the axis movement in-program signal (Fn102) or
the axis movement direction signal (Fn106) of the slave
axis in superimposed control is output, state output is
performed, according to the result of superimposition
(0) / according to the result of movement on each axis
(1)
#5 NCS If an overtravel occurs on an axis under synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control, synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control is, released (0) /
not released (1)
#6 SPE The synchronization deviation is, the difference PRM
between the positional deviation of the master axis and 8162#1=1
that of the slave axis (0) / the difference between the 8181
positional deviation of the master axis and that of the
slave axis plus the acc./dec. delay difference (1)
#7 NRS By a reset, synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control is, released (0) / not released (1)
08161 Synchronous/composite control
#0 NMR When an axis subject to composite control is placed in PRM
servo-off state, composite control is, canceled (0) / not 1819#0
canceled if follow-up operation for the axis is disabled
(1)
#5 CRZ If the state of the composite control axis selection signal
is switched in composite control on two axes under Cs
contour control, the reference position establishment
state of the two axes in composite control is,
maintained (0) / assumed to be unestablished (1)
#7 NSR When servo-off state occurs with an axis in PRM
synchronous control, synchronous control, is canceled 1819#0
(0) / not canceled if follow-up operation for the axis is
disabled (1)
08162 Mirror image, Synchronous, composite, and <Axis>
superimposed control
#0 SMR Synchronous mirror-image control is, not applied (0) /
applied (1)
#1 SER The synchronization deviation is, not detected (0) / PRM8181
detected (1)
#2 PKU In the parking state, the absolute, relative, and machine PRM
coordinates are not updated (0) / the absolute and 8167#1
relative coordinates are updated but the machine
coordinates are not updated (1)
#3 OMR Superimposed mirror-image control is, not applied (0) /
applied (1)
#4 MPM When composite control is started, the workpiece PRM
coordinate system is, not set automatically (0) / set 8184
automatically (1)
#5 MPS When composite control is terminated, the workpiece PRM1250
coordinate system is, not set automatically (0) / set
automatically (1)
#6 MCD When composite control is applied, the coordinate
system direction for the relevant axes, remains the
same without applying mirror image (0) / is reversed by
applying mirror image (1)
#7 MUM In composite control, move command specification for
the axis is, not prohibited (0) / prohibited (1)
08163 Synchronous/composite control <Axis>
#1 SPM When synchronous control is started, automatic PRM8185
workpiece system setting for the master axis is, not
performed (0) / performed (1)
#2 SPS When synchronous control is terminated, automatic PRM1250
workpiece coordinate setting for the master axis is, not
performed (0) / performed (1)
347
B-63947EN/01
348
7 PARAMETERS
#4 SWM In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the T series
start of synchronous control, a workpiece shift is, not PRM
considered (0) / considered (1) 8163#1
#5 SWS In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the T series
end of synchronous control, a workpiece shift is, not PRM
considered (0) / considered (1) 8163#2
8167#6
#6 SPV At the end of synchronous control, automatic workpiece PRM1250
coordinate system setting for the slave axis is, not
performed (0) / performed (1)
08168 Emergency stop, servo off, servo alarm
#0 MPA If an alarm concerning synchronous control, composite
control, or superimposed control is issued, all paths of
the machine group to which the alarm occurrence path
belongs are placed in the feed hold state (0) / only the
path including the axis with which the alarm is issued is
place in the feed hold state (1)
#1 MSO When an emergency stop, servo-off state, or servo-off PRM
alarm occurs in synchronous control, composite control, 8168#2
or superimposed control, the synchronous control,
composite control, or superimposed control state is
canceled and follow-up operation is not performed (0) /
the synchronous control, composite control, or
superimposed control state is not canceled and
follow-up operation is performed (1)
#2 SVF When an axis under composite control is placed in the PRM
servo-off state, composite control is canceled (0) / 8161#0
composite control is not canceled and follow-up 8168#1
operation follows the setting of parameter (No. 1819#0)
(1)
#3 OFF In superimposed control, feed forward is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
08169 Position display, rapid traverse <Axis>
#0 MDM As machine coordinates in composite control,
coordinates for the local path are displayed (0) /
coordinates for the other path in composite control are
displayed (1)
#1 MVM When machine coordinates are read in composite
control, machine coordinates for the local path are read
(0) / machine coordinates for the other path in
composite control are read (1)
#2 MRF The rapid traverse rate used in composite control is,
rapid traverse rate for the specified axis (0) / rapid
traverse rate for the move axis (1)
08180 Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under <Axis>
synchronous control
08181 Synchronization error limit of each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit] PRM
8162#1
08183 Composite control axis of the other path in composite <Axis>
control for each axis
08184 Coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the <Axis>
coordinate system of another axis under composite PRM
control 8162#4=1
08185 Workpiece coordinates on each axis at the reference <Axis>
position PRM
8163#1=1
08186 Master axis for each axis under superimposed control <Axis>
08190 Rapid traverse rate for each axis under superimposed <Axis>
control [mm/min]
08191 F0 velocity of rapid traverse override for an axis under <Axis>
superimposed control [mm/min]
08192 Linear acc./dec. time constant in rapid traverse for each <Axis>
axis under superimposed control [ms]
349
B-63947EN/01
350
7 PARAMETERS
#4 SYP If the same value needs to be set in the parameter for
the master axis and the parameter for the slave axis, and
a value is set in the parameter for the master axis, the
value is, not automatically set for the slave axis (0) / set
automatically for the slave axis (1)
#7 SOF In axis synchronous control, the synchronization Slave axis
establishment function based on machine coordinates is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
08304 Modification mode, Uni-directional synchronization, <Axis>
External machine coordinate system shift
#0 SSA When the uni-directional synchronization establishment
function under axis synchronous control is used, the axis
with a larger machine coordinate is used as the
reference (0) / the axis with a smaller machine
coordinate is used as the reference (1)
#2 ADJ In axis synchronous control, this parameter specifies, an
axis along which a movement is not made in the
modification mode (0) / an axis along which a movement
is made in the modification mode (1)
#3 CLP In axis synchronous control, synchronization error Slave axis
compensation is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 MVB In the modification mode, a move command in a PRM
direction that increases a synchronization error is, invalid 8304#2
(0) / valid (1)
#5 SCA In axis synchronous control, synchronous operation is, Slave axis
performed when the axis synchronous control selection
signal SYNC for slave axes or the axis synchronous
control manual feed selection signal SYNCJ is set to 1
(0) / performed at all times (1)
#6 SMS The synchronization error smooth suppress function is, Slave axis
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 SYE When external machine coordinate system shift is Slave axis
specified by external data input/output for the master
axis in synchronous control, the slave axis is, not shifted
(0) / shifted by the same amount as specified for the
master axis (1)
08305 Uni-directional synchronization function
#0 SSO The uni-directional synchronization function in axis
synchronous control is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 SSE After an emergency stop, the uni-directional
synchronization function in axis synchronous control is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#2 SRF In axis synchronous control, G28, G30, or G53,
synchronizes the slave axis with the master axis (0) /
makes movements along the slave axis and master axis
independently to specified positions (1)
#3 TWJ When manual interrupt amounts are specified with the
twin table control function in the synchronous operation
mode or in the single slave axis operation mode, only the
interrupt amount for the master axis is accepted and
reflected in the master axis/slave axis (0) / the interrupt
amount for the master axis is reflected in the master
axis, and the interrupt amount for the slave axis is
reflected in the slave axis (1)
08311 Axis number of master axis in axis synchronous <Axis>
control/twin table control
08312 Enabling/disabling mirror image in axis synchronous <Axis>
control Slave axis
08314 Maximum allowable error in synchronization error check <Axis>
based on machine coordinates Slave axis
08323 Limit in positional deviation check in axis synchronous <Axis>
control [Detection unit] Slave axis
PRM
8301#4
351
B-63947EN/01
7.2.57 Chopping
08360 Chopping
#0 ROV As rapid traverse override for a section from the
chopping start point to point R, chopping override is
used (0) / rapid traverse override is used (1)
#2 CVC The feedrate along the chopping axis is changed, at the
upper or lower dead point immediately after the feedrate
change command is issued (0) / at the upper dead point
immediately after the feedrate change command is
issued (1)
#7 CHF On the chopping screen, a chopping feedrate, can be set
(0) / cannot be set (1)
08370 Chopping axis
08371 Chopping reference point (point R)
08372 Chopping upper dead point
08373 Chopping lower dead point
08374 Chopping feedrate
08375 Maximum chopping feedrate <Axis>
PRM1420
08376 Chopping compensation factor [%]
08377 Chopping compensation start tolerance [Detection unit]
352
7 PARAMETERS
08456 Override for range 2 that is applied during deceleration PRM
according to the cutting load in AI contour control [%] 19515#1
08457 Override for range 3 that is applied during deceleration 19516
according to the cutting load in AI contour control [%]
08458 Override for range 4 that is applied during deceleration
according to the cutting load in AI contour control [%]
08459 Override
#3 OVRB For deceleration based on a feedrate difference or
acceleration rate in AI contour control, override is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
08465 Maximum allowable feedrate for AI contour control PRM
8451#7
08466 Maximum allowable feedrate for AI contour control PRM
(when a rotary axis is specified singly) 8451#7,
8465
08486 Maximum travel distance of a block where smooth
interpolation or Nano smoothing is applied
08487 Angle at which smooth interpolation or Nano smoothing
is turned off [deg]
08490 Minimum travel distance of a block where smooth
interpolation or Nano smoothing is applied
08491 Maximum tolerance for a block where smooth
interpolation is applied
08492 Minimum tolerance for a block where smooth PRM
interpolation is applied 8491
353
B-63947EN/01
354
7 PARAMETERS
08570 Controlled axis for which the 1st high-speed position
switch function is performed
08571 Controlled axis for which the 2nd high-speed position
switch function is performed
: :
08579 Controlled axis for which the 10th high-speed position
switch function is performed
08580 Maximum value of the operation range of the 1st
high-speed position switch
08581 Maximum value of the operation range of the 2nd
high-speed position switch
: :
08589 Maximum value of the operation range of the tenth
high-speed position switch
08590 Minimum value of the operation range of the 1st
high-speed position switch
08591 Minimum value of the operation range of the 2nd
high-speed position switch
: :
08599 Minimum value of the operation range of the tenth
high-speed position switch
7.2.60 Others
08650 Setting for the C language executor
#0 RSK When the <RESET> key is pressed, the key code is, not passed
to the application (0) / passed to the application (1)
#1 CNA If a CNC alarm is issued when the user screen for the C language
executor is displayed, the screen display is, automatically
switched to the alarm screen (depending on the setting of
parameter (No. 3111#7)) (0) / not switched to the alarm screen (1)
#2 EKY The extended portion of the MDI keys is, not read (0) / read (1)
08661 Size of the variable area used by the C language executor
[K bytes]
08662 Size of the SRAM disk used by the C language executor [K bytes]
08663 Time zone setting [sec]
08760 Program number of data input/output (Power Mate CNC
manager)
08781 DRAM size used for the C language executor
08811 2-word parameter 1 for the machine tool builder
08812 2-word parameter 2 for the machine tool builder
08813 2-word parameter 3 for the machine tool builder
7.2.61 Maintenance
08900 Parameter setting
#0 PWE The setting, from an external device and MDI panel, of
those parameters that cannot be set by setting input is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
08901 Maintenance
#0 FAN A fan motor error is, detected (0) / not detected (1) Usually,
#7 MEN The periodic maintenance screen is, displayed (0) / not set 0.
displayed (1)
08911 Percentage for life warning display on the periodic
maintenance screen [%]
08950 Display of memory contents
#0 MEM The memory contents display screen is, not displayed (0) /
displayed (1)
355
B-63947EN/01
356
7 PARAMETERS
09026 Linear interpolation <Axis>
#0 NDT Inclusion in a calculated cutting distance value is, Linear inter-
performed (0) / not performed (1) polation only
09032 Background color
#0 BGW When a monochrome LCD unit is used, the background
color is, black (0) / white (1)
09033 P-CODE macro
#0 DBG Conversational macros are placed in, normal mode (0) /
debug mode (1)
#1 SEP Auxiliary macros/conversational macros are executed,
in series (0) / in parallel (1)
#2 MVD Monochrome display is based on, two tones (0) /
brightness modulation mode (1)
#3 EV2 P-CODE variables (#10000 and up) hold, floating-point
numbers (0) / integers (1)
#4 EVF The extended P-CODE variables (#20000 and up) hold,
floating-point numbers (0) / integers (1)
#5 SHS When the high-speed cycle cutting function is enabled,
#20000 and up are, high-speed cycle cutting variables
(0) / P-CODE variables (1)
09034 P-CODE macro common variable
#0 MV0 The P-CODE macro common variables are,
#1 MV1 independent common variables (0) / shared as custom
#2 MV2 macro common variables (1)
#3 MV3 MV0 : #100 to 149
#4 MV4 MV1 : #150 to 199
#5 MV5 MV2 : #500 to 549
#6 MV6 MV3 : #550 to 599
#7 MV7 MV4 : #600 to 699
MV5 : #700 to 799
MV6 : #800 to 899
MV7 : #900 to 999
09035 Interlock for each axis direction, P-CODE macro
#0 XIT Interlock for each axis direction is, disabled (0) / PRM9070
enabled (1)
#1 RCN Upon NC reset, reader/puncher control based on
conversational macros is, not interrupted (0) /
interrupted with completion code (#8539) = 12 (1)
#3 EUI For P-CODE macros, UI00 to UI15 and UO00 to UO15
are used (0) / EUI00 to EUI15 and EUO00 to EUO15
are used (1)
#4 CWB If reader/puncher interface control data transmission
(G336) or macro variable data output (G338) is
specified, the data is output, when an EOB is detected
(0) / when the transmit buffer is full or the line is closed
(1)
#5 NPA If automatic operation is performed without selecting a ALM
main program when P-CODE workpiece number PS1079
search is enabled, the operation is not performed (0) /
an alarm is issued (1)
09036 Auxiliary macro
#2 AFT Forced termination of the auxiliary macro function is, Usually, set
disabled (0) / enabled (1) 0.
#3 AMP When an auxiliary macro is used for input/output based
on the reader/puncher interface/memory card control
function, status is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#4 NOB A G310 (relative coordinate preset and PMC data
read/write function) block in an execution macro is
executed, as an NC statement (0) / as a macro
statement (1)
09048 P-CODE macro number of an execution macro
09049 P-CODE macro number of a conversation macro
09050 P-CODE macro number of an auxiliary macro
09051 Area number for P-CODE variables (#10000 and up)
357
B-63947EN/01
358
7 PARAMETERS
10220 Upper limit 6 of tool offsets No.01
10221 Upper limit 6 of tool offsets No.02
: :
10239 Upper limit 6 of tool offsets No.20
10240 Lower limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.01 PRM
10241 Lower limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.02 10000 -
: : 10239
10259 Lower limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.20
10260 Upper limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.01
10261 Upper limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.02
: :
10279 Upper limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.20
10280 Lower limit 7 of tool offsets No.01
10281 Lower limit 7 of tool offsets No.02
10282 Lower limit 7 of tool offsets No.03
10283 Lower limit 7 of tool offsets No.04
10284 Upper limit 7 of tool offsets No.01
10285 Upper limit 7 of tool offsets No.02
10286 Upper limit 7 of tool offsets No.03
10287 Upper limit 7 of tool offsets No.04
10288 Lower limit 8 of tool offsets No.01
10289 Lower limit 8 of tool offsets No.02
10290 Lower limit 8 of tool offsets No.03
10291 Lower limit 8 of tool offsets No.04
10292 Upper limit 8 of tool offsets No.01
10293 Upper limit 8 of tool offsets No.02
10294 Upper limit 8 of tool offsets No.03
10295 Upper limit 8 of tool offsets No.04
10296 Lower limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.01 PRM
10297 Lower limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.02 10280 -
10298 Lower limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.03 10295
10299 Lower limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.04
10300 Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.01 PRM
10301 Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.02 10280 -
10302 Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.03 0295
10303 Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.04
10304 Lower limit of workpiece origin offsets No.01 <Axis>
10305 Lower limit of workpiece origin offsets No.02
: :
10309 Lower limit of workpiece origin offsets No.06
10310 Upper limit of workpiece origin offsets No.01 <Axis>
10311 Upper limit of workpiece origin offsets No.02
: :
10315 Upper limit of workpiece origin offsets No.06
10316 Lower limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.01 PRM
10317 Lower limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.02 10304 -
: : 10315
10321 Lower limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.06
10322 Upper limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.01 PRM
10323 Upper limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.02 10304 -
: : 10315
10327 Upper limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.06
10328 Lower limit of workpiece shifts <Axis>
10329 Upper limit of workpiece shifts <Axis>
10330 Confirmation message
#0 IIC At the time of incremental input, a confirmation message
is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#1 PDC At the time of program deletion, a confirmation message
is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#2 ADC At the time of deletion of all data, a confirmation message
is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#3 HSC When a cycle start is executed halfway in the program, a
confirmation message is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
359
B-63947EN/01
7.2.66 Diagnosis
10600 Waveform diagnosis
#0 IOF Waveform diagnostic data is output in, 30i/31i/32i format
(0) / 16i/18i/21i format (1)
360
7 PARAMETERS
7.2.67 Three-dimensional Error Compensation
10800 1st compensation axis for 3-dimensional error compensation
10801 2nd compensation axis for 3-dimensional error compensation
10802 3rd compensation axis for 3-dimensional error compensation
10803 Number of compensation points for 3-dimensional error
compensation (1st compensation axis)
10804 Number of compensation points for 3-dimensional error
compensation (2nd compensation axis)
10805 Number of compensation points for 3-dimensional error
compensation (3rd compensation axis)
10806 Compensation point number of the reference position for
3-dimensional error compensation (1st compensation axis)
10807 Compensation point number of the reference position for
3-dimensional error compensation (2nd compensation axis)
10808 Compensation point number of the reference position for
3-dimensional error compensation (3rd compensation axis)
10809 Magnification for 3-dimensional error compensation (1st
compensation axis)
10810 Magnification for 3-dimensional error compensation (2nd
compensation axis)
10811 Magnification for 3-dimensional error compensation (3rd
compensation axis)
10812 Compensation interval for 3-dimensional error compensation
(1st compensation axis)
10813 Compensation interval for 3-dimensional error compensation
(2nd compensation axis)
10814 Compensation interval for 3-dimensional error compensation
(3rd compensation axis)
361
B-63947EN/01
362
7 PARAMETERS
11068 Time constant for retraction in rigid tapping based on <Axis>
the servo motor/Cs contour control (4th gear stage)
[ms]
11090 Path with which a rotation command is specified for PRM
each axis 3702#2=0
3703#3=1
363
B-63947EN/01
364
7 PARAMETERS
11307 Coordinate display order PRM
11305
Coordinate display order
Value 1 2 3 4
0 Relative Absolute Machine Remaining move
coordinate coordinate coordinate distance
1 Relative Machine Absolute Remaining move
coordinate coordinate coordinate distance
2 Relative Remaining move Absolute Machine
coordinate distance coordinate coordinate
3 Absolute Machine Relative Remaining move
coordinate coordinate coordinate distance
4 Absolute Remaining move Relative Machine
coordinate distance coordinate coordinate
5 Machine Remaining move Relative Absolute
coordinate distance coordinate coordinate
365
B-63947EN/01
7.2.71 PMC
11900 PMC of execution order 1 in the multi-PMC function
11901 PMC of execution order 2 in the multi-PMC function
11902 PMC of execution order 3 in the multi-PMC function
11905 Execution time percentage (%) of PMC of execution order 1
in the multi-PMC function
11906 Execution time percentage (%) of PMC of execution order 2
in the multi-PMC function
11907 Execution time percentage (%) of PMC of execution order 3
in the multi-PMC function
11910 I/O Link channel 1 input/output addresses
11911 I/O Link channel 2 input/output addresses
11912 I/O Link channel 3 input/output addresses
11913 I/O Link channel 4 input/output addresses
11915 Input/output address of the 2nd block of I/O Link channel 1
11916 Input/output address of the 2nd block of I/O Link channel 2
11917 Input/output address of the 2nd block of I/O Link channel 3
11918 Input/output address of the 2nd block of I/O Link channel 4
11920 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 1
11921 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 2
11922 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 3
11923 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 4
11924 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 5
11925 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 6
11926 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 7
11927 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 8
11928 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 9
11929 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 10
11930 PMC execution period, Execution period of ladder level 1
11931 Ladder execution with the PMC, External message
#0 PCC For a multi-path PMC, ladder execution and stop are,
controlled individually for each PMC path (0) / controlled
simultaneously for all PMC paths (1)
#1 M16 In external data input or external message display, the
number of displayable external alarm messages or external
operator messages is, 4 (0) / 16 (1)
11932 PMC inter-path interface
11940 Type of PMC memory of the 1st-path PMC
11941 Type of PMC memory of the 2nd-path PMC
366
7 PARAMETERS
11942 Type of PMC memory of the 3rd-path PMC
367
B-63947EN/01
12045 Macro program number for the embedded macro function (9th set)
12046 Number of G code macros for the embedded machine function (9th set)
12047 G code number for the embedded macro function (10th set)
12048 Macro program number for the embedded macro function (10th set)
12049 Number of G code macros for the embedded machine function (10th set)
368
7 PARAMETERS
12312 States of the 1st manual handle feed axis selection
signals when a movement is made in the 2nd axis
direction in tool axis normal direction handle
feed/interrupt and table-based horizontal direction
handle feed/interrupt
12313 States of the 1st manual handle feed axis selection
signals when the 1st rotary axis is turned in tool tip
center rotation handle feed/interrupt
12314 States of the 1st manual handle feed axis selection
signals when the 2nd rotary axis is turned in tool tip
center rotation handle feed/interrupt
12318 Tool length in 3-dimensional manual feed
12320 3-dimensional manual feed
#0 TWD The directions of 3-dimensional manual feed (other
than tool tip center rotation feed) when the tilted
working plane command is issued are, the same as
those not in the tilted working plane command (0) / X,
Y, and Z directions in the feature coordinate system (1)
#1 FLL The directions of tool axis normal direction feed or
table-based horizontal direction feed in the
3-dimensional manual feed mode are, tool axis normal
direction 1 (table-based horizontal direction 1) and tool
axis normal direction 2 (table-based horizontal
direction 2) (0) / longitude direction and latitude
direction (1)
#2 JFR As the feedrate of 5-axis machining jog feed or PRM
incremental feed, the dry run rate is used (0) / the jog 1410,1423
feedrate is used (1)
12321 Normal axis direction
1: Positive (+) X-axis direction / 2: Positive (+) Y-axis direction /
3: Positive (+) Z-axis direction /
0: Reference tool axis direction (PRM19697)
12322 Angle used to determine whether to assume the tool
axis direction to be parallel to the normal direction
(PRM 12321) [deg]
12323 Manual handle number subject to 3-dimensional
manual feed
12330 Pulse (channel 1) 1 of the manual pulse generator
#0 G10 When PMC group 0 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#1 G11 When PMC group 1 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#2 G12 When PMC group 2 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#3 G13 When PMC group 3 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#4 G14 When PMC group 4 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#5 G15 When PMC group 5 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
369
B-63947EN/01
370
7 PARAMETERS
#5 G25 When PMC group 5 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#6 G26 When PMC group 6 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#7 G27 When PMC group 7 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
12333 Pulse (channel 2) 2 of the manual pulse generator
#0 G28 When PMC group 8 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#1 G29 When PMC group 9 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#2 G2A When PMC group 10 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#3 G2B When PMC group 11 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#4 G2C When PMC group 12 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#5 G2D When PMC group 13 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#6 G2E When PMC group 14 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#7 G2F When PMC group 15 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
12334 Pulse (channel 3) 1 of the manual pulse generator
#0 G30 When PMC group 0 (channel 3) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#1 G31 When PMC group 1 (channel 3) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#2 G32 When PMC group 2 (channel 3) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#3 G33 When PMC group 3 (channel 3) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
371
B-63947EN/01
372
7 PARAMETERS
#3 G43 When PMC group 3 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#4 G44 When PMC group 4 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#5 G45 When PMC group 5 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#6 G46 When PMC group 6 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#7 G47 When PMC group 7 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
12337 Pulse (channel 4) 2 of the manual pulse generator
#0 G48 When PMC group 8 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#1 G49 When PMC group 9 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#2 G4A When PMC group 10 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#3 G4B When PMC group 11 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#4 G4C When PMC group 12 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#5 G4D When PMC group 13 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#6 G4E When PMC group 14 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
#7 G4F When PMC group 15 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
12340 PMC path number of the 1st manual handle connected PRM
to the I/O Link 12300 -
12341 PMC path number of the 2nd manual handle 12304
connected to the I/O Link
12342 PMC path number of the 3rd manual handle connected
to the I/O Link
12343 PMC path number of the 4th manual handle connected
to the I/O Link
12344 PMC path number of the 5th manual handle connected
to the I/O Link
12350 Manual handle feed magnification, m, for each axis <Axis>
PRM7113
373
B-63947EN/01
374
7 PARAMETERS
12993 G code modal group (4th) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
12994 G code modal group (5th) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
12995 G code modal group (6th) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
12996 G code modal group (7th) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
12997 G code modal group (8th) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
12998 G code modal group (9th) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
12999 G code modal group (10th) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
375
B-63947EN/01
#3 IAU For MDI key input, the AUX key is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#4 SI1 Soft key input of <, >, ¥, %, $, !, ~, :, ", and ' is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#5 SI2 Input of (, ), ?, *, &, @,and _ by soft keys, and switching of
uppercase/lowercase input mode by soft keys are, disabled
(0) / enabled (1)
#6 KBC When lowercase letters are input on the standard
ONGP-MDI unit, '[' and ']' are, not converted to '<' and '>'
respectively (0) / converted to '<' and '>' respectively (1)
#7 P10 When the CNC screen display function is used on the
300is/310is/320is with a 15" display unit, the screen display
mode used is, 15" mode (0) / 10.4" mode (1)
13131 Group number for simultaneous display of multiple paths
13132 Simultaneous multi-path display order number
13140 1st character in spindle load meter display T
13141 2nd character in spindle load meter display series
7
7.2.78 Tool Management Functions
13200 Tool management functions
#0 TCF When a T code is specified with the tool management
function, a cartridge number and pot number found by
the NC are output (0) / the specified T code is output
without modification (1)
#1 THN When NX.T and HD.T are displayed with the tool
management function, the tool type numbers at the 1st
spindle position and the 1st standby position are
displayed (0) / the values specified from the PMC
window are displayed (1)
#2 TRT As the remaining lifetime value for outputting the tool PRM
life arrival notice signal, the remaining lifetime of the 13200#3=0
last tool is used (0) / the sum of the remaining lifetimes
of the tools with the same type number is used (1)
#3 ETE The tool life arrival notice signal is output, for each tool
type (0) / for each tool (1)
#4 TP2 The punch-out format of cartridge management data is,
new registration format (0) / modification format (1)
#5 T0O When T0 is specified, a tool search is made assuming
that the tool type number is 0 (0) / the cartridge number
and pot number are assumed to be 0 (1)
#6 NAM When a T code is specified, but a valid tool with a ALM
remaining lifetime cannot be found, an alarm is issued PS5317
(0) / the tool with the maximum tool management
number is selected from the tools of the specified tool
type number, and the TMFNFD signal (F315#6) is set
to 1 (1)
#7 NFD When a T code is specified, but a valid tool with a
remaining lifetime cannot be found in the cartridge, the
spindle position and standby position are also searched
(0) / the spindle position and standby position are not
searched (1)
13201 Tool management function screen display
#0 TDC The function for customizing the tool management data
screen is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 TDN On the screen dedicated to the tool management
function, tool life status is displayed using, up to 6
characters (0) / up to 12 characters (1)
#2 TDB Tool information is displayed, in conventional mode (0)
/ in 1/0 mode (1)
#3 TME Support for multi-edge tools with the tool management
function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 TFT Data extraction using those items that are specified on
the tool management table screen is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
376
7 PARAMETERS
13202 Tool management function screen display
#1 DCR On the tool management function screen, tool nose T series
radius compensation data is, displayed (0) / not Combined
displayed (1) type
#2 DOY On the tool management function screen, Y-axis offset T series
data is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1) Combined
type
#3 DOB On the tool management function screen, B-axis offset T series
data is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1) Combined
type
#4 DO2 On the tool management function screen, the 2nd T series
geometry tool offset data is, displayed (0) / not Combined
displayed (1) type
#6 DOT On the tool management function screen, the tool offset T series
data (X, Z) of the T series is, displayed (0) / not Combined
displayed (1) type
#7 DOM On the tool management function screen, the offset M series
data of the M series is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1) Combined
type
13203 Cartridge search
#0 NM1 The 1st cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#1 NM2 The 2nd cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#2 NM3 The 3rd cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#3 NM4 The 4th cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#4 TSI When support for multi-edge tools with the tool PRM
management function is enabled, a tool is found by 13201#3=1
remaining lifetime (0) / the tool placed at the spindle
position or standby position has priority in selection (1)
#5 NTS In tool search operation performed when support for PRM
multi-edge tools with the tool management function is 13201#3=1
enabled, the edge group including a tool whose edge
life has expired is, searched (0)/not searched (1)
#6 SWC When a tool is found from those with the same tool type PRM13260
number, a tool with a short lifetime is found (0) / a tool
with a small customization data number is found (1)
#7 TCN Tool life count operation is triggered by, M06/restart M
code (0) / T code (1)
13204 Tool management data protection key, Attach/detach
signal
#0 TDL The key-based protection function for tool management
data is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 ATA The tool attach signal, cartridge number signal, and pot
number signal are, used (0) / not used (1)
#2 DTA The tool detach signal, cartridge number signal, and pot
number signal are, used (0) / not used (1)
#3 MGL When the tool management function is used, the data
protection function based on the cartridge management
table signal is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 SWL When the tool management function is used, the data
protection function based on the spindle/standby
position table is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#5 TGI When tool management number 0 is specified in
programmable data input (G10), the CNC, does not
automatically select a free tool management number
(0) / automatically selects a free tool management
number (1)
13205 Cartridge search
#0 NM5 The 5th cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#1 NM6 The 6th cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#2 NM7 The 7th cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#3 NM8 The 8th cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#7 TMI When a tool offset command (H99, D99) is specified
with the tool management function, modal information
is based on, tool offset number set in specified tool
management data (0) / specified number (99) (1)
13220 Number of valid tools in tool management data
377
B-63947EN/01
378
7 PARAMETERS
13321 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number a
of moving axis 6
13322 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number b
of moving axis 6
13323 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number c
of moving axis 6
13324 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number d
of moving axis 6
13351 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
a of moving axis 4 [Detection unit]
13352 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
b of moving axis 4 [Detection unit]
13353 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
c of moving axis 4 [Detection unit]
13354 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
d of moving axis 4 [Detection unit]
13361 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
a of moving axis 5 [Detection unit]
13362 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
b of moving axis 5 [Detection unit]
13363 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
c of moving axis 5 [Detection unit]
13364 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
d of moving axis 5 [Detection unit]
13371 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
a of moving axis 6 [Detection unit]
13372 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
b of moving axis 6 [Detection unit]
13373 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
c of moving axis 6 [Detection unit]
13374 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
d of moving axis 6 [Detection unit]
13381 Number of the straightness compensation point at the
farthest end on the minus (-) side on moving axis 1
13382 Number of the straightness compensation point at the
farthest end on the minus (-) side on moving axis 2
13383 Number of the straightness compensation point at the
farthest end on the minus (-) side on moving axis 3
13384 Number of the straightness compensation point at the
farthest end on the minus (-) side on moving axis 4
13385 Number of the straightness compensation point at the
farthest end on the minus (-) side on moving axis 5
13386 Number of the straightness compensation point at the
farthest end on the minus (-) side on moving axis 6
13391 Straightness compensation: Compensation magnification
of moving axis 1
13392 Straightness compensation: Compensation magnification
of moving axis 2
13393 Straightness compensation: Compensation magnification
of moving axis 3
13394 Straightness compensation: Compensation magnification
of moving axis 4
13395 Straightness compensation: Compensation magnification
of moving axis 5
13396 Straightness compensation: Compensation magnification
of moving axis 6
13500 Start number of main tool offset numbers M series
13501 Number of data items in the 5th cartridge
13502 Start pot number of the 5th cartridge
13503 Number of data items in the 6th cartridge
13504 Start pot number of the 6th cartridge
13505 Number of data items in the 7th cartridge
13506 Start pot number of the 7th cartridge
13507 Number of data items in the 8th cartridge
379
B-63947EN/01
380
7 PARAMETERS
13621 Allowable acceleration rate when AI contour control is used <Axis>
(precision level 10)
13622 Time constant for acc./dec. after interpolation when AI <Axis>
contour control is used (precision level 1) [ms]
13623 Time constant for acc./dec. after interpolation when AI <Axis>
contour control is used (precision level 10) [ms]
13624 Corner speed difference when AI contour control is used <Axis>
(precision level 1)
13625 Corner speed difference when AI contour control is used <Axis>
(precision level 10)
13626 Maximum cutting speed when AI contour control is used <Axis>
(precision level 1)
13627 Maximum cutting speed when AI contour control is used <Axis>
(precision level 10)
13628 Parameter number corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when
AI contour control is used
13629 Parameter number corresponding to arbitrary item 2 when
AI contour control is used
13630 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the <Axis>
parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when AI contour
control is used
13631 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the <Axis>
parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 2 when AI contour
control is used
13632 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 10) of the <Axis>
parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when AI contour
control is used
13633 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 10) of the <Axis>
parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 2 when AI contour
control is used
13634 Precision level currently selected when AI contour control is
used
381
B-63947EN/01
382
7 PARAMETERS
13964 Minimum operation range of the 5th safe position switch
13965 Minimum operation range of the 6th safe position switch
13966 Minimum operation range of the 7th safe position switch
13967 Minimum operation range of the 8th safe position switch
13968 Minimum operation range of the 9th safe position switch
13969 Minimum operation range of the 10th safe position switch
13970 Minimum operation range of the 11th safe position switch
13971 Minimum operation range of the 12th safe position switch
13972 Minimum operation range of the 13th safe position switch
13973 Minimum operation range of the 14th safe position switch
13974 Minimum operation range of the 15th safe position switch
13975 Minimum operation range of the 16th safe position switch
13976 Minimum operation range of the 17th safe position switch
13977 Minimum operation range of the 18th safe position switch
13978 Minimum operation range of the 19th safe position switch
13979 Minimum operation range of the 20th safe position switch
13980 Minimum operation range of the 21st safe position switch
13981 Minimum operation range of the 22nd safe position switch
13982 Minimum operation range of the 23rd safe position switch
13983 Minimum operation range of the 24th safe position switch
13984 Minimum operation range of the 25th safe position switch
13985 Minimum operation range of the 26th safe position switch
13986 Minimum operation range of the 27th safe position switch
13987 Minimum operation range of the 28th safe position switch
13988 Minimum operation range of the 29th safe position switch
13989 Minimum operation range of the 30th safe position switch
13990 Minimum operation range of the 31st safe position switch
13991 Minimum operation range of the 32nd safe position switch
7.2.82 FSSB
14000 Inch/metric switching at a point other than the
reference position
#1 INA When inch/metric switching is performed at a point <Axis>
other than the reference position, operation is
performed as conventionally done (0) / an alarm is
issued (1)
14010 Maximum allowable travel distance when a reference <Axis>
position is established for a linear scale with an ALM
absolute address reference position [Detection unit] PS5326
14310 Program coordinate system switching, Offset memory <Axis>
switching
#0 WD1X When the coordinate system is switched using the
program coordinate system switch function, the
coordinate axis directions (not applicable to a
workpiece coordinate system, for G54 and G54P1 to
G54P48) are, the same as for the machine coordinate
system (0) / opposite to those of the machine
coordinate system (1)
#1 WD2X When the coordinate system is switched using the
program coordinate system switch function, the
coordinate axis directions (for G55) are, the same as
for the machine coordinate system (0) / opposite to
those of the machine coordinate system (1)
#2 WD3X When the coordinate system is switched using the
program coordinate system switch function, the
coordinate axis directions (for G56) are, the same as
for the machine coordinate system (0) / opposite to
those of the machine coordinate system (1)
#3 WD4X When the coordinate system is switched using the
program coordinate system switch function, the
coordinate axis directions (for G57) are, the same as
for the machine coordinate system (0) / opposite to
those of the machine coordinate system (1)
383
B-63947EN/01
384
7 PARAMETERS
14382 ATR value corresponding to connector 7 on the 1st separate
detector interface unit
14383 ATR value corresponding to connector 8 on the 1st separate
detector interface unit
14384 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the 2nd separate
detector interface unit
14385 ATR value corresponding to connector 2 on the 2nd separate
detector interface unit
14386 ATR value corresponding to connector 3 on the 2nd separate
detector interface unit
14387 ATR value corresponding to connector 4 on the 2nd separate
detector interface unit
14388 ATR value corresponding to connector 5 on the 2nd separate
detector interface unit
14389 ATR value corresponding to connector 6 on the 2nd separate
detector interface unit
14390 ATR value corresponding to connector 7 on the 2nd separate
detector interface unit
14391 ATR value corresponding to connector 8 on the 2nd separate
detector interface unit
14392 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the 3rd separate
detector interface unit
14393 ATR value corresponding to connector 2 on the 3rd separate
detector interface unit
14394 ATR value corresponding to connector 3 on the 3rd separate
detector interface unit
14395 ATR value corresponding to connector 4 on the 3rd separate
detector interface unit
14396 ATR value corresponding to connector 5 on the 3rd separate
detector interface unit
14397 ATR value corresponding to connector 6 on the 3rd separate
detector interface unit
14398 ATR value corresponding to connector 7 on the 3rd separate
detector interface unit
14399 ATR value corresponding to connector 8 on the 3rd separate
detector interface unit
14400 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the 4th separate
detector interface unit
14401 ATR value corresponding to connector 2 on the 4th separate
detector interface unit
14402 ATR value corresponding to connector 3 on the 4th separate
detector interface unit
14403 ATR value corresponding to connector 4 on the 4th separate
detector interface unit
14404 ATR value corresponding to connector 5 on the 4th separate
detector interface unit
14405 ATR value corresponding to connector 6 on the 4th separate
detector interface unit
14406 ATR value corresponding to connector 7 on the 4th separate
detector interface unit
14407 ATR value corresponding to connector 8 on the 4th separate
detector interface unit
14408 ATR value corresponding to slave 01 on an additional axis board
14409 ATR value corresponding to slave 02 on an additional axis board
14410 ATR value corresponding to slave 03 on an additional axis board
14411 ATR value corresponding to slave 04 on an additional axis board
14412 ATR value corresponding to slave 05 on an additional axis board
14413 ATR value corresponding to slave 06 on an additional axis board
14414 ATR value corresponding to slave 07 on an additional axis board
14415 ATR value corresponding to slave 08 on an additional axis board
14416 ATR value corresponding to slave 09 on an additional axis board
14417 ATR value corresponding to slave 10 on an additional axis board
14418 ATR value corresponding to slave 11 on an additional axis board
14419 ATR value corresponding to slave 12 on an additional axis board
385
B-63947EN/01
386
7 PARAMETERS
#3 IRB In defining the rotation direction of the rotary axis for rotating
group B, the direction of rotation from the positive direction of
the 1st axis in the plane to the positive direction of the 2nd
axis in the plane is used as, positive direction (0) / negative
direction (1)
14901 Setting of whether the rectangle of group A or group B
rotates when a movement is made on the rotary axis
#0 NA1 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 1 of
group A, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#1 NA2 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 2 of
group A, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#2 NA3 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 3 of
group A, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#3 NA4 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 4 of
group A, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#4 NB1 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 1 of
group B, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#5 NB2 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 2 of
group B, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#6 NB3 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 3 of
group B, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#7 NB4 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 4 of
group B, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
14902 Move and rotation direction of group C or group D
#0 ICA1 The move direction of the 1st axis in the moving plane in
group C is, the same as for the 1st axis in the moving plane
in group A (0) / opposite to that of the 1st axis in the moving
plane in group A (1)
#1 ICA2 The move direction of the 2nd axis in the moving plane in
group C is, the same as for the 2nd axis in the moving plane
in group A (0) / opposite to that of the 2nd axis in the moving
plane in group A (1)
#2 IDA1 The move direction of the 1st axis in the moving plane in
group D is, the same as for the 1st axis in the moving plane
in group A (0) / opposite to that of the 1st axis in the moving
plane in group A (1)
#3 IDA2 The move direction of the 2nd axis in the moving plane in
group D is, the same as for the 2nd axis in the moving plane
in group A (0) / opposite to that of the 2nd axis in the moving
plane in group A (1)
#4 IRC In defining the rotation direction of the rotary axis in group C,
the direction of rotation from the positive direction of the 1st
axis in the plane to the positive direction of the 2nd axis in the
plane is used as, positive direction (0) / negative direction (1)
#5 IRD In defining the rotation direction of the rotary axis in group D,
the direction of rotation from the positive direction of the 1st
axis in the plane to the positive direction of the 2nd axis in the
plane is used as, positive direction (0) / negative direction (1)
14903 Setting of whether the rectangle of group C or group D
rotates when a movement is made on the rotary axis
#0 NC1 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 1 of
group C, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#1 NC2 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 2 of
group C, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#2 NC3 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 3 of
group C, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#3 NC4 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 4 of
group C, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#4 ND1 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 1 of
group D, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#5 ND2 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 2 of
group D, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#6 ND3 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 3 of
group D, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#7 ND4 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 4 of
group D, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
387
B-63947EN/01
14910 Axis number of the 1st axis in the plane for moving group A
14911 Axis number of the 2nd axis in the plane for moving group A
14912 Axis number of the rotary axis for rotating group A
14913 Axis number of the 1st axis in the plane for moving group B
14914 Axis number of the 2nd axis in the plane for moving group B
14915 Axis number of the rotary axis for rotating group B
14916 Axis number of the 1st axis in the plane for moving group C
14917 Axis number of the 2nd axis in the plane for moving group C
14918 Axis number of the rotary axis for rotating group C
14920 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group A PRM14912
14921 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group A , 14938
14922 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group A PRM14912
14923 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group A , 14938
14924 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 2 in group A PRM14912
14925 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 2 in group A , 14938
14926 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 2 in group A PRM14912
14927 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 2 in group A , 14938 7
14928 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 3 in group A PRM14912
14929 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 3 in group A , 14938
14930 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 3 in group A PRM14912
14931 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 3 in group A , 14938
14932 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 4 in group A PRM14912
14933 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 4 in group A , 14938
14934 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 4 in group A PRM14912
14935 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 4 in group A , 14938
14936 Center of rotation of the 1st axis for rotating group A
14937 Center of rotation of the 2nd axis for rotating group A
14938 Reference rotation angle for the rotary axis in group A
[deg]
14940 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group B PRM14915
14941 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group B , 14958
14942 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group B PRM14915
14943 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group B , 14958
14944 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 2 in group B PRM14915
14945 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 2 in group B , 14958
14946 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 2 in group B PRM14915
14947 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 2 in group B , 14958
14948 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 3 in group B PRM14915
14949 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 3 in group B , 14958
14950 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 3 in group B PRM14915
14951 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 3 in group B , 14958
14952 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 4 in group B PRM14915
14953 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 4 in group B , 14958
14954 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 4 in group B PRM14915
14955 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 4 in group B , 14958
14956 Center of rotation of the 1st axis for rotating group B
14957 Center of rotation of the 2nd axis for rotating group B
14958 Reference rotation angle for the rotary axis in group B
[deg]
14960 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group C PRM14918
14961 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group C , 14978
14962 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group C PRM14918
14963 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group C , 14978
14964 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 2 in group C PRM14918
14965 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 2 in group C , 14978
14966 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 2 in group C PRM14918
14967 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 2 in group C , 14978
14968 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 3 in group C PRM14918
14969 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 3 in group C , 14978
14970 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 3 in group C PRM14918
14971 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 3 in group C , 14978
14972 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 4 in group C PRM14918
14973 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 4 in group C , 14978
388
7 PARAMETERS
14974 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 4 in group C PRM14918
14975 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 4 in group C , 14978
14976 Center of rotation of the 1st axis for rotating group C
14977 Center of rotation of the 2nd axis for rotating group C
14978 Reference rotation angle for the rotary axis in group C
[deg]
389
B-63947EN/01
390
7 PARAMETERS
19566 Optimal torque acc./dec. (deceleration at P3 during <Axis>
movement in - direction and acceleration) [0.01%]
19567 Optimal torque acc./dec. (deceleration at P4 during PRM1671
movement in - direction and acceleration) [0.01%]
19568 Optimal torque acc./dec. (deceleration at P5 during
movement in - direction and acceleration) [0.01%]
391
B-63947EN/01
392
7 PARAMETERS
19636 Angle used to determine whether to execute the
interference check/avoidance function of
3-dimensional cutter compensation [deg]
19650 Tool axis tool length compensation function, Tool axis <Axis>
direction tool length compensation function
#0 RAM With the tool axis tool length compensation function,
the axis is, not used as a rotary axis (0) / used as a
rotary axis (1)
#1 RAP The rotary axis used with the tool axis direction tool
length compensation function is, an ordinary rotary
axis (0) / a parameter axis (1)
19655 Axis number of the linear axis to which a rotary axis <Axis>
belongs
19656 Tool axis direction
19657 Master rotary axis number
19658 Angular displacement of a rotary axis [deg] <Axis>
19659 Offset value for the angular displacement of a rotary <Axis>
axis [deg]
19660 Origin offset value of a rotary axis [deg] <Axis>
19661 Rotation center compensation vector in tool axis <Axis>
direction tool length compensation
19662 Spindle center compensation vector in tool axis <Axis>
direction tool length compensation
19665 Controlled point shift, Tool holder offset function
#4 SPR The controlled point is shifted by, automatic
calculation (0) / using parameter (No. 19667) (1)
#5 SVC The controlled point is, not shifted (0) / shifted (1) PRM
19665#4
#7 ETH The tool holder offset function in tool length
compensation is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
19666 Tool holder offset value PRM19665#7
Radius
19667 Controlled-point shift vector <Axis>
PRM19665#4,#5
Radius
19680 Mechanical unit type PRM19696#0,#1
19681 Controlled-axis number for the 1st rotary axis PRM19696#0
19682 Axis direction of the 1st rotary axis
19683 Inclination angle when the 1st rotary axis is an inclined
axis [deg]
19684 Rotation direction of the 1st rotary axis PRM19682
19685 Rotation angle when the 1st rotary axis is a PRM
hypothetical axis [deg] 19696#0
19686 Controlled-axis number for the 2nd rotary axis PRM
19696#1
19687 Axis direction of the 2nd rotary axis
1: On X-axis
2: On Y-axis
3: On Z-axis
4: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the X-axis from the
positive X-axis to positive Y-axis
5: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the Y-axis from the
positive Y-axis to positive Z-axis
6: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the Z-axis from the
positive Z-axis to positive X-axis
19688 Inclination angle when the 2nd rotary axis is inclined PRM19687
[deg]
19689 Rotation direction of the 2nd rotary axis PRM19687
19690 Rotation angle when the 2nd rotary axis is a PRM
hypothetical axis [deg] 19696#1
19696 Rotary axis, Hypothetical axis
#0 IA1 The 1st rotary axis is, an ordinary rotary axis (0) / a
hypothetical axis (1)
#1 IA2 The 2nd rotary axis is, an ordinary rotary axis (0) / a
hypothetical axis (1)
393
B-63947EN/01
394
7 PARAMETERS
#4 TBP When 3-dimensional cutter compensation is
performed on a 5-axis machine with a table rotary
axis, the programming coordinate system is the
workpiece coordinate system (0) / the setting of
parameter WKP (No. 19696#5) is used (1)
#6 CRS When the deviation from the path during movement at PRM
the specified cutting feedrate or rapid traverse rate 19751,
exceeds the limit in tool center point control, the 19752
feedrate or rapid traverse rate is not decreased (0) /
an allowable range is specified by parameter setting
(1)
19751 Limit of the deviation from the path (for rapid traverse) PRM
19752 Limit of the deviation from the path (for cutting feed) 19746#6
395
Index
COMMAND RANGE............................................................................. 121
Comparison .......................................................................................... 627
Configuration of Printed Circuit Board Connectors and Cards ...... 128, 153
Confirmation of Communications Based on the Ping Command........... 682
Confirmation of Connection with the Hub Unit ...................................... 681
Confirmation of Each Parameter Setting............................................... 682
Confirming the parameters required for data output ............................. 795
CONTROL COMMAND ........................................................................ 113
Control Unit .......................................................................................... 175
Coordinate System (Parameter) ........................................................... 245
Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System Specified
by CNC - Coordinate System ................................................................. 42
Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on spindle
tuning screen........................................................................................ 760
Counter ................................................................................................ 625
CUSTOM MACRO.................................................................................. 97
Custom Macros (Parameter) ................................................................ 317
<D>
Data input ............................................................................................. 784
Data Input/Output ([I/O] Screen) ........................................................... 585
Data output........................................................................................... 784
Data search .......................................................................................... 630
Data transfer......................................................................................... 626
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................ s-1
Detailed Descriptions about Invalid Servo Parameter Setting Alarms ... 693
Details of Functional Instructions .......................................................... 625
Details of Invalid Servo Parameter Alarms (on the CNC Side).............. 691
Details of Invalid Servo Parameter Setting Alarms (on the Servo Side) 693
Details of Separate Serial Pulsecoder Alarms ...................................... 691
Details of Serial Pulsecoder.................................................................. 690
DeviceNet board................................................................................... 225
DI/DO (Parameter) ............................................................................... 267
Diagnosis (Parameter).......................................................................... 360
Diagnosis Data Related to Axis Synchronous Control .......................... 702
Diagnosis Data Related to Linear Scale with Absolute Address
Reference Marks .................................................................................. 703
Diagnosis Data Related to Rigid Tapping ............................................. 698
Diagnosis Data Related to Synchronous/Composite Control ................ 702
Diagnosis Data Related to the Dual Position Feedback Function ......... 700
Diagnosis Data Related to the Inductosyn Absolute Position Detector . 697
Diagnosis Data Related to the Serial Spindles ..................................... 697
Diagnosis Data Related to the Small-hole Peck Drilling Cycle .............. 699
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ...................................................................... 689
DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION................................................................ 689
DIGITAL SERVO .................................................................................. 723
Digital Servo (2).................................................................................... 701
Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured........................ 35
Display and Edit (Parameter)................................................................ 269
Display and Edit 2 (Parameter)............................................................. 375
Display method..................................................................................... 755
Display of Causes of Instructions not Functioning ................................ 689
Display unit........................................................................................... 147
Display Unit for 300is/310is/320is ................................................ 191, 204
Display Unit for 30i/31i/32i ................................................................... 180
Display until the CNC Starts ................................................................. 767
Displaying a Program List ([LIST] Screen)............................................ 596
Displaying and Editing I/O Module Allocation Data
([MODULE] Screens)............................................................................ 609
Displaying and Editing Message Data ([MESAGE] Screens)................ 609
Displaying and Editing PMC Settings ([SETING] Screens) ................... 610
Displaying and Editing Symbol and Comment Data
([SYMBOL] Screens) ............................................................................ 607
Displaying and Editing Title Data ([TITLE] Screens) ............................. 606
Displaying and Entering Setting Data ..................................................... 32
Displaying and Setting Configuration Parameters
([CONFIG PARAM] Screens) ............................................................... 616
i-2
B-63947EN/01
i-3
Index
External Data Input (Parameter) ........................................................... 325
EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGE HISTORY .................................. 707
EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS ..................................................... 120
External/Macro Alarm Display .............................................................. 706
<F>
Fast Data Server Operation Screen...................................................... 667
Fast Ethernet board.............................................................................. 212
Feedrate (Parameter) ........................................................................... 248
File Operation (PROG Key) .................................................................. 647
Fixture Offset (Parameter) .................................................................... 340
Flexible Synchronous Control (Parameter) ........................................... 315
FL-net board......................................................................................... 219
FSSB (Parameter) ................................................................................ 383
FSSB Display and Setting Screen ........................................................ 732
FSSB SETTING SCREEN.................................................................... 732
FTP File Transfer Operation Screen..................................................... 652
FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ....................................................... 9
FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................... 621
Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of SUB No.) ................ 639
<G>
G CODE ................................................................................................. 67
G CODE LIST IN THE LATHE SYSTEM ................................................ 73
G CODE LIST IN THE MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM........................ 69
General Screen Operations ...................................................................... 9
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................. s-1
Graphic Display (Parameter) ................................................................ 328
<H>
Half-size kana input .............................................................................. 790
Handle Interrupt Display ......................................................................... 20
HARDWARE ........................................................................................ 123
Hardware Configuration........................................................................ 803
Hardware Configuration Screen............................................................ 769
Hardware Structure .............................................................. 123, 152, 170
HELP FUNCTION................................................................................... 52
High-speed Cutting (Parameter) ........................................................... 340
High-speed Position Switch (Parameter) .............................................. 353
High-speed Position Switch 2 (Parameter) ........................................... 368
History Data Not Displayed on the Screen............................................ 712
HISTORY FUNCTION .......................................................................... 705
HOW TO ENTER THE PARAMETERS ................................................ 237
HSSB interface board........................................................................... 218
<I>
I/O ................................................................................................ 150, 209
I/O Communication Error Messages..................................................... 492
I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT NAMES .................................................. 642
I/O MODULE VIEWER screen.............................................................. 609
Inclination Compensation (Parameter) ................................................. 317
Index Table (Parameter)....................................................................... 314
Initial Menu Screen................................................................................. 52
INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS .......................................... 723
INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA .......................................................... 793
Input/output of maintenance information............................................... 789
Input/Output on the ALL IO Screen....................................................... 799
Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data .................................. 712
Inputting CNC parameters .................................................................... 797
Inputting custom macro variable values................................................ 798
Inputting part programs ........................................................................ 799
Inputting pitch error compensation amount........................................... 798
Inputting tool compensation amount ..................................................... 799
Inputting/outputting a program.............................................................. 800
Inputting/outputting custom macro common variables .......................... 802
Inputting/Outputting Data...................................................................... 794
Inputting/outputting offset data ............................................................. 801
Inputting/outputting parameters ............................................................ 800
i-4
B-63947EN/01
i-5
Index
Method B of gear change for M series
(parameter SGB (No. 3705#2)=1) ........................................................ 754
Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66) ................................. 114
Modal Call: Each Block Call (G66.1)..................................................... 115
Monitoring Ladder Diagrams ([LADDER] Screen)................................. 597
Monitoring PMC Signal Status ([STATUS] Screen) .............................. 572
Monitoring the Network Communication Status and the PMC Signal
Status ([I/O DGN] Screen) .................................................................... 593
MONOCHROME LCD BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT.......................... 831
Mounting locations of optional boards .................................................. 231
Multi-path (Parameter).......................................................................... 346
<N>
Nano Smoothing (Parameter)............................................................... 391
NET EDITOR Screen ........................................................................... 601
Next Block Display Screen ..................................................................... 25
Normal Direction Control (Parameter) .................................................. 314
<O>
Operating Monitor Display ...................................................................... 21
OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN........................................................ 569
Operation Errors ................................................................................... 481
OPERATION HISTORY........................................................................ 708
Operation instruction ............................................................................ 633
OPERATION LIST.................................................................................. 57
Operation Method Screen....................................................................... 55
Operation of soft keys........................................................................... 788
Operations for Color Setting ................................................................. 829
Operations on the System Alarm Screen.............................................. 463
Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration (Parameter) ..................... 390
Option setting screen............................................................................ 827
Optional Board ..................................................................................... 212
Other Alarms (DS Alarm)...................................................................... 446
Other Screens ...................................................................................... 826
Other Units ........................................................................................... 232
Others ...........................................................................151, 167, 210, 743
Others (Parameter)............................................................................... 355
OUTPUTTING ALL HISTORY DATA.................................................... 715
Outputting CNC parameters ................................................................. 796
Outputting custom macro variable values ............................................. 796
Outputting Data .................................................................................... 719
Outputting operation history data.......................................................... 712
Outputting part program ....................................................................... 796
Outputting pitch error compensation amount ........................................ 796
Outputting tool compensation amount .................................................. 796
Overall Position Display.......................................................................... 19
Overheat Alarms (OH Alarm)................................................................ 446
Overtravel Alarms (OT Alarm) .............................................................. 440
Overview of Hardware .......................................................... 124, 152, 171
OVERVIEW OF HISTORY FUNCTION ................................................ 705
Overview of Spindle Control ................................................................. 753
<P>
Parameter..................................................................................... 784, 791
PARAMETER LIST............................................................................... 239
Parameter Setting................................................................. 708, 708, 738
Parameter Setting Screen ............................................................ 648, 660
Parameter Table Screen......................................................................... 56
Parameter Writing Alarm (SW Alarm) ................................................... 431
PARAMETERS..................................................................................... 237
PARAMETERS..................................................................................... 687
Path Table Operation Function (Parameter) ......................................... 363
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE SCREEN ............................................. 775
Pitch Error Compensation (Parameter)................................................. 280
Pitch Error Compensation 2 (Parameter).............................................. 389
PMC ..................................................................................................... 569
PMC (Parameter) ................................................................................. 366
PMC Alarm Messages.......................................................................... 473
i-6
B-63947EN/01
i-7
Index
SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ............................. 40
SELECTING OPERATION HISTORY SIGNALS .................................. 713
Separate detector interface unit............................................................ 232
Sequence Number Comparison and Stop (Parameter)......................... 352
SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE ..................................................... 753
Serial Spindle (Parameter) ................................................................... 286
Servo (Parameter) ................................................................................ 252
Servo Alarms (SV Alarm)...................................................................... 432
Servo Motor Temperature Information.................................................. 692
SERVO TUNING SCREEN .................................................................. 738
Setting (Parameter) .............................................................................. 241
SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS.............................................................. 1
Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen) ................ 575
Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen) ........................... 581
Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen) ............. 576
Setting and Displaying the Tool Offset Value.......................................... 29
Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen).................... 573
Setting and Maintenance (SYSTEM key).............................................. 646
Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen) ....................... 589
Setting Parameters for Input/Output ..................................................... 793
Setting screen display and setting ........................................................ 781
SIGNAL LIST (X/Y, G/F)....................................................................... 501
Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen) ............................................. 589
Simple Call (G65) ................................................................................. 114
Single Direction Positioning (Parameter) .............................................. 314
Skip Functions (Parameter) .................................................................. 322
Small MDI Unit (ONG Key) ....................................................................... 5
Software Configuration Screen............................................................. 770
Software Operator's Panel (Parameter)................................................ 335
Software Operator's Panel 2 (Parameter) ............................................. 338
Spindle Alarms (SP Alarm) ................................................................... 443
Spindle Control (Parameter) ................................................................. 281
Spindle Control 2 (Parameter) .............................................................. 302
Spindle Control Based on Servo Motor/Cs Contour Control
(Parameter) .......................................................................................... 361
Spindle Error and Warning States ........................................................ 701
Spindle Information Screen .................................................................. 763
Spindle monitor screen......................................................................... 758
Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen ...................................................... 755
Spindle setting screen .......................................................................... 756
Spindle tuning screen ........................................................................... 757
SRAM DATA UTILITY screen............................................................... 814
STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE ................................ 170
Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) ................................................................. 4
Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key) .......................................................... 4
Starting the boot system....................................................................... 805
State of High-speed HRV Current Control ............................................ 701
State of TH Alarm ................................................................................. 689
Status screen (Series 300i/310i/320i only) ........................................... 826
Status screen display and setting ......................................................... 776
Straightness Compensation (Parameter).............................................. 316
Straightness Compensation 2 (Parameter)........................................... 378
Stroke Limit Check (Parameter)............................................................ 246
Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address .......................................... 118
Subprogram Call Using an M Code ...................................................... 116
Subprogram Calls Using a Secondary Auxiliary Function ..................... 117
Subprogram Calls Using a T Code ....................................................... 117
Subprogram Calls Using an S Code ..................................................... 117
SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen (basic format) ............ 607
SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen (extended format) ...... 608
Synchronous/Composite Control and Superimposed Control
(Parameter) .......................................................................................... 347
SYSTEM ALARMS ............................................................................... 462
System Alarms 114 to 130 (Alarms on the FSSB) ................................ 467
System Alarms Detected by Hardware ................................................. 466
i-8
B-63947EN/01
SYSTEM ALARMS RELATED TO THE PMC AND I/O LINK ................ 469
System Configuration (Parameter) ....................................................... 243
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN DISPLAY ................................ 768
SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen ........................................................... 809
SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen.......................................................... 811
SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen .............................................................. 813
System files and user files .................................................................... 805
System Label Check Error.................................................................... 768
SYSTEM VARIABLE .............................................................................. 97
<T>
T series ................................................................................................ 754
Thermal Growth Compensation along Tool Vector ............................... 701
Three-dimensional Error Compensation (Parameter) ........................... 361
Timer .................................................................................................... 625
Title (message) data display screen ..................................................... 607
Tool Compensation (Parameter)........................................................... 303
Tool Compensation 2 (Parameter)........................................................ 391
Tool Life Management (Parameter) ...................................................... 329
Tool Management Functions (Parameter) ............................................ 376
Total Connection Diagrams .................................................. 125, 152, 172
Tracing Data......................................................................................... 718
Transition of the PMC Screens............................................................. 570
TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................... 681
TYPES OF VARIABLES ......................................................................... 97
<U>
USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen ................. 807
<W>
Warning................................................................................ 688, 785, 792
Warning Interface ................................................................................. 762
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING .................... s-4
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING ........... s-2
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ............................. s-5
WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS.................................................................... 717
WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS PARAMETER SCREEN............................. 717
Wrong Operation Prevention Function (Parameter).............................. 358
<α>
αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN ................................................... 744
αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE ..................................................... 748
i-9
Revision Record